System Analysis and Tuning

Guide
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP3
System Analysis and Tuning Guide
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP3

An administrator's guide for problem detection, resolution and optimization. Find

how to inspect and optimize your system by means of monitoring tools and how to
efficiently manage resources. Also contains an overview of common problems and
solutions and of additional help and documentation resources.

Publication Date: September 01, 2017

SUSE LLC
10 Canal Park Drive
Suite 200
Cambridge MA 02141
USA
https://www.suse.com/documentation

Copyright © 2006– 2017 SUSE LLC and contributors. All rights reserved.

Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Docu-
mentation License, Version 1.2 or (at your option) version 1.3; with the Invariant Section being this copyright
notice and license. A copy of the license version 1.2 is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation
License”.

For SUSE trademarks, see http://www.suse.com/company/legal/ . All other third-party trademarks are the prop-
erty of their respective owners. Trademark symbols (®, ™ etc.) denote trademarks of SUSE and its affiliates.
Asterisks (*) denote third-party trademarks.

All information found in this book has been compiled with utmost attention to detail. However, this does not
guarantee complete accuracy. Neither SUSE LLC, its affiliates, the authors nor the translators shall be held liable
for possible errors or the consequences thereof.
 Contents

About This Guide xii

I BASICS 1

1 General Notes on System Tuning 2

1.1 Be Sure What Problem to Solve 2

1.2 Rule Out Common Problems 3

1.3 Finding the Bottleneck 4

1.4 Step-by-step Tuning 4

II SYSTEM MONITORING 5

2 System Monitoring Utilities 6

2.1 Multi-Purpose Tools 7
vmstat 7 • dstat 10 • System Activity Information: sar 11

2.2 System Information 15

Device Load Information: iostat 15 • Processor Activity Monitoring:
mpstat 16 • Processor Frequency Monitoring: turbostat 16 • Task
Monitoring: pidstat 17 • Kernel Ring Buffer: dmesg 17 • List of
Open Files: lsof 18 • Kernel and udev Event Sequence Viewer: udevadm
monitor 18

2.3 Processes 19
Interprocess Communication: ipcs 19 • Process List: ps 20 • Process
Tree: pstree 21 • Table of Processes: top 22 • z Systems Hypervisor
Monitor: hyptop 23 • A top-like I/O Monitor: iotop 25 • Modify a
process's niceness: nice and renice 26

iii System Analysis and Tuning Guide

 2.4 Memory 27
Memory Usage: free 27 • Detailed Memory Usage: /proc/
meminfo 27 • Process Memory Usage: smaps 32

2.5 Networking 32
Basic Network Diagnostics: ip 32 • Show the Network Usage of Processes:
nethogs 33 • Ethernet Cards in Detail: ethtool 34 • Show the Network
Status: ss 35

2.6 The /proc File System 36

procinfo 39 • System Control Parameters: /proc/sys/ 40

2.7 Hardware Information 41

PCI Resources: lspci 41 • USB Devices: lsusb 42 • Monitoring
and Tuning the Thermal Subsystem: tmon 42 • MCELog: Machine Check
Exceptions (MCE) 43 • x86_64: dmidecode: DMI Table Decoder 43

2.8 Files and File Systems 44

Determine the File Type: file 44 • File Systems and Their Usage: mount,
df and du 45 • Additional Information about ELF Binaries 46 • File
Properties: stat 46

2.9 User Information 47

User Accessing Files: fuser 47 • Who Is Doing What: w 47

2.10 Time and Date 48

Time Measurement with time 48

2.11 Graph Your Data: RRDtool 49

How RRDtool Works 49 • A Practical Example 50 • For More
Information 54

3 Analyzing and Managing System Log Files 55

3.1 System Log Files in /var/log/ 55

3.2 Viewing and Parsing Log Files 57

3.3 Managing Log Files with logrotate 57

3.4 Monitoring Log Files with logwatch 58

iv System Analysis and Tuning Guide

 3.5 Using logger to Make System Log Entries 60

III KERNEL MONITORING 61

4 SystemTap—Filtering and Analyzing System Data 62

4.1 Conceptual Overview 62
SystemTap Scripts 62 • Tapsets 63 • Commands and
Privileges 63 • Important Files and Directories 64

4.2 Installation and Setup 65

4.3 Script Syntax 66

Probe Format 67 • SystemTap Events (Probe Points) 68 • SystemTap
Handlers (Probe Body) 69

4.4 Example Script 73

4.5 User Space Probing 74

4.6 For More Information 75

5 Kernel Probes 76
5.1 Supported Architectures 76

5.2 Types of Kernel Probes 77

Kprobes 77 • Jprobes 77 • Return Probe 77

5.3 Kprobes API 78

5.4 debugfs Interface 79

Listing Registered Kernel Probes 79 • How to Switch All Kernel Probes On or
Off 79

5.5 For More Information 80

6 Hardware-Based Performance Monitoring with

Perf 81
6.1 Hardware-Based Monitoring 81

6.2 Sampling and Counting 81

v System Analysis and Tuning Guide

 6.3 Installing Perf 82

6.4 Perf Subcommands 82

6.5 Counting Particular Types of Event 83

6.6 Recording Events Specific to Particular Commands 84

6.7 For More Information 85

7 OProfile—System-Wide Profiler 86
7.1 Conceptual Overview 86

7.2 Installation and Requirements 86

7.3 Available OProfile Utilities 87

7.4 Using OProfile 87

Creating a Report 87 • Getting Event Configurations 89

7.5 Using OProfile's GUI 90

7.6 Generating Reports 91

7.7 For More Information 91

IV RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 93

8 General System Resource Management 94

8.1 Planning the Installation 94
Partitioning 94 • Installation Scope 95 • Default Target 95

8.2 Disabling Unnecessary Services 95

8.3 File Systems and Disk Access 96

File Systems 97 • Time Stamp Update Policy 97 • Prioritizing Disk
Access with ionice 98

9 Kernel Control Groups 99

9.1 Technical Overview and Definitions 99

9.2 Scenario 100

vi System Analysis and Tuning Guide

 9.3 Control Group Subsystems 100

9.4 Using Controller Groups 104

Prerequisites 104 • Example: Cpusets 104 • Example:
cgroups 105 • Setting Directory and File Permissions 106

9.5 For More Information 107

10 Automatic Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA)

Balancing 108
10.1 Implementation 108

10.2 Configuration 109

10.3 Monitoring 110

10.4 Impact 111

11 Power Management 113

11.1 Power Management at CPU Level 113
C-States (Processor Operating States) 113 • P-States (Processor Performance
States) 114 • Turbo Features 115

11.2 In-Kernel Governors 115

11.3 The cpupower Tools 116

Viewing Current Settings with cpupower 117 • Viewing Kernel Idle Statistics
with cpupower 117 • Monitoring Kernel and Hardware Statistics with
cpupower 118 • Modifying Current Settings with cpupower 120

11.4 Monitoring Power Consumption with powerTOP 120

11.5 Special Tuning Options 122

Tuning Options for P-States 122

11.6 Troubleshooting 122

11.7 For More Information 123

vii System Analysis and Tuning Guide

 V KERNEL TUNING 124

12 Tuning I/O Performance 125

12.1 Switching I/O Scheduling 125

12.2 Available I/O Elevators 126

CFQ (Completely Fair Queuing) 126 • NOOP 130 • DEADLINE 131

12.3 I/O Barrier Tuning 131

12.4 Enable blk-mq I/O Path for SCSI by Default 132

13 Tuning the Task Scheduler 133

13.1 Introduction 133
Preemption 133 • Timeslice 134 • Process Priority 134

13.2 Process Classification 134

13.3 Completely Fair Scheduler 135

How CFS Works 136 • Grouping Processes 136 • Kernel
Configuration Options 136 • Terminology 137 • Changing Real-
time Attributes of Processes with chrt 138 • Runtime Tuning with
sysctl 138 • Debugging Interface and Scheduler Statistics 142

13.4 For More Information 144

14 Tuning the Memory Management Subsystem 145

14.1 Memory Usage 145
Anonymous Memory 146 • Pagecache 146 • Buffercache 146 • Buffer
Heads 146 • Writeback 146 • Readahead 147 • VFS caches 147

14.2 Reducing Memory Usage 148

Reducing malloc (Anonymous) Usage 148 • Reducing Kernel Memory
Overheads 148 • Memory Controller (Memory Cgroups) 148

14.3 Virtual Memory Manager (VM) Tunable Parameters 149

Reclaim Ratios 149 • Writeback Parameters 150 • Timing Differences
of I/O Writes between SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 and SUSE Linux Enterprise
11 152 • Readahead Parameters 153 • Transparent Huge Page

viii System Analysis and Tuning Guide

 Parameters 153 • khugepaged Parameters 155 • Further VM
Parameters 155

14.4 Monitoring VM Behavior 156

15 Tuning the Network 158

15.1 Configurable Kernel Socket Buffers 158

15.2 Detecting Network Bottlenecks and Analyzing Network Traffic 160

15.3 Netfilter 160

15.4 Improving the Network Performance with Receive Packet Steering

(RPS) 160

15.5 For More Information 162

VI HANDLING SYSTEM DUMPS 163

16 Tracing Tools 164

16.1 Tracing System Calls with strace 164

16.2 Tracing Library Calls with ltrace 168

16.3 Debugging and Profiling with Valgrind 169

Installation 169 • Supported Architectures 170 • General
Information 170 • Default Options 171 • How Valgrind
Works 171 • Messages 172 • Error Messages 174

16.4 For More Information 174

17 Kexec and Kdump 175

17.1 Introduction 175

17.2 Required Packages 175

17.3 Kexec Internals 176

17.4 Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size 177

17.5 Basic Kexec Usage 181

17.6 How to Configure Kexec for Routine Reboots 182

ix System Analysis and Tuning Guide

 17.7 Basic Kdump Configuration 182
Manual Kdump Configuration 183 • YaST Configuration 185

17.8 Analyzing the Crash Dump 187

Kernel Binary Formats 188

17.9 Advanced Kdump Configuration 191

17.10 For More Information 192

VII SYNCHRONIZED CLOCKS WITH PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL 194

18 Precision Time Protocol 195

18.1 Introduction to PTP 195
PTP Linux Implementation 195

18.2 Using PTP 196

Network Driver and Hardware Support 196 • Using ptp4l 197 • ptp4l
Configuration File 198 • Delay Measurement 198 • PTP Management
Client: pmc 199

18.3 Synchronizing the Clocks with phc2sys 200

Verifying Time Synchronization 201

18.4 Examples of Configurations 202

18.5 PTP and NTP 203

NTP to PTP Synchronization 203 • PTP to NTP Synchronization 204

A Documentation Updates 205

A.1 September 2017 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12
SP3) 205

A.2 November 2016 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12

SP2) 206

A.3 March 2016 (Maintenance Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12

SP1) 207

A.4 December 2015 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12

SP1) 207

x System Analysis and Tuning Guide

 A.5 February 2015 (Documentation Maintenance Update) 209

A.6 October 2014 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12) 209

B GNU Licenses 213

B.1 GNU Free Documentation License 213

xi System Analysis and Tuning Guide

About This Guide

SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop is used for a broad range of usage scenarios in enterprise and
scientific data centers. SUSE has ensured SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop is set up in a way that
it accommodates different operation purposes with optimal performance. However, SUSE Linux
Enterprise Desktop must meet very different demands when employed on a number crunching
server compared to a le server, for example.
It is not possible to ship a distribution that is optimized for all workloads. Different workloads
vary substantially in some aspects. Most important among those are I/O access patterns, memory
access patterns, and process scheduling. A behavior that perfectly suits a certain workload might
reduce performance of another workload. For example, I/O-intensive tasks, such as handling
database requests, usually have completely different requirements than CPU-intensive tasks,
such as video encoding. The versatility of Linux makes it possible to configure your system in
a way that it brings out the best in each usage scenario.
This manual introduces you to means to monitor and analyze your system. It describes methods
to manage system resources and to tune your system. This guide does not offer recipes for spe-
cial scenarios, because each server has got its own different demands. It rather enables you to
thoroughly analyze your servers and make the most out of them.

Part I, “Basics”
Tuning a system requires a carefully planned proceeding. Learn which steps are necessary
to successfully improve your system.

Part II, “System Monitoring”

Linux offers a large variety of tools to monitor almost every aspect of the system. Learn
how to use these utilities and how to read and analyze the system log les.

Part III, “Kernel Monitoring”

The Linux kernel itself offers means to examine every nut, bolt and screw of the system.
This part introduces you to SystemTap, a scripting language for writing kernel modules that
can be used to analyze and filter data. Collect debugging information and nd bottlenecks
by using kernel probes and Perf. Last, monitor applications with Oprofile.

Part IV, “Resource Management”

Learn how to set up a tailor-made system fitting exactly the server's need. Get to know how
to use power management while at the same time keeping the performance of a system at
a level that matches the current requirements.

xii SLED 12 SP3

Part V, “Kernel Tuning”
The Linux kernel can be optimized either by using sysctl, via the /proc and /sys le sys-
tems or by kernel command line parameters. This part covers tuning the I/O performance
and optimizing the way how Linux schedules processes. It also describes basic principles
of memory management and shows how memory management can be ne-tuned to suit
needs of specific applications and usage patterns. Furthermore, it describes how to opti-
mize network performance.

Part VI, “Handling System Dumps”

This part enables you to analyze and handle application or system crashes. It introduces
tracing tools such as strace or ltrace and describes how to handle system crashes using
Kexec and Kdump.

Tip: Getting the SUSE Linux Enterprise SDK

The SDK is a module for SUSE Linux Enterprise and is available via an online channel
from the SUSE Customer Center. Alternatively, go to http://download.suse.com/ , search
for SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit and download it from there.
Refer to Book “Deployment Guide”, Chapter 10 “Installing Modules, Extensions, and Third Party
Add-On Products” for details.

1 Available Documentation

Note: Online Documentation and Latest Updates

Documentation for our products is available at http://www.suse.com/documentation/ ,
where you can also nd the latest updates, and browse or download the documentation
in various formats.

In addition, the product documentation is usually available in your installed system under /
usr/share/doc/manual .

The following documentation is available for this product:

Article “Installation Quick Start”

Lists the system requirements and guides you step-by-step through the installation of SUSE
Linux Enterprise Desktop from DVD, or from an ISO image.

xiii Available Documentation SLED 12 SP3

Book “Deployment Guide”
Shows how to install single or multiple systems and how to exploit the product inher-
ent capabilities for a deployment infrastructure. Choose from various approaches, ranging
from a local installation or a network installation server to a mass deployment using a
remote-controlled, highly-customized, and automated installation technique.

Book “Administration Guide”

Covers system administration tasks like maintaining, monitoring and customizing an ini-
tially installed system.

Book “Security Guide”

Introduces basic concepts of system security, covering both local and network security
aspects. Shows how to use the product inherent security software like AppArmor or the
auditing system that reliably collects information about any security-relevant events.

System Analysis and Tuning Guide

An administrator's guide for problem detection, resolution and optimization. Find how to
inspect and optimize your system by means of monitoring tools and how to efficiently
manage resources. Also contains an overview of common problems and solutions and of
additional help and documentation resources.

Book “GNOME User Guide”

Introduces the GNOME desktop of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop. It guides you through
using and configuring the desktop and helps you perform key tasks. It is intended mainly
for end users who want to make efficient use of GNOME as their default desktop.

2 Feedback
Several feedback channels are available:

Bugs and Enhancement Requests

For services and support options available for your product, refer to http://www.suse.com/
support/ .
Help for openSUSE is provided by the community. Refer to https://en.opensuse.org/Por-
tal:Support for more information.
To report bugs for a product component, go to https://scc.suse.com/support/requests ,
log in, and click Create New.

xiv Feedback SLED 12 SP3

User Comments
We want to hear your comments about and suggestions for this manual and the other doc-
umentation included with this product. Use the User Comments feature at the bottom of
each page in the online documentation or go to http://www.suse.com/documentation/feed-
back.html and enter your comments there.

Mail
For feedback on the documentation of this product, you can also send a mail to doc-
[email protected] . Make sure to include the document title, the product version and the
publication date of the documentation. To report errors or suggest enhancements, provide
a concise description of the problem and refer to the respective section number and page
(or URL).

3 Documentation Conventions
The following notices and typographical conventions are used in this documentation:

/etc/passwd : directory names and le names

PLACEHOLDER : replace PLACEHOLDER with the actual value

PATH : the environment variable PATH

ls , --help : commands, options, and parameters

user : users or groups

package name : name of a package

Alt , Alt – F1 : a key to press or a key combination; keys are shown in uppercase as on
a keyboard

File, File Save As: menu items, buttons

Dancing Penguins (Chapter Penguins, ↑Another Manual): This is a reference to a chapter in

another manual.

Commands that must be run with root privileges. Often you can also prefix these com-
mands with the sudo command to run them as non-privileged user.

root # command

xv Documentation Conventions SLED 12 SP3

 tux > sudo command

Commands that can be run by non-privileged users.

tux > command

Notices

Warning: Warning Notice

Vital information you must be aware of before proceeding. Warns you about security
issues, potential loss of data, damage to hardware, or physical hazards.

Important: Important Notice

Important information you should be aware of before proceeding.

Note: Note Notice

Additional information, for example about differences in software versions.

Tip: Tip Notice

Helpful information, like a guideline or a piece of practical advice.

xvi Documentation Conventions SLED 12 SP3

I Basics

1 General Notes on System Tuning 2

1 General Notes on System Tuning

This manual discusses how to nd the reasons for performance problems and pro-
vides means to solve these problems. Before you start tuning your system, you
should make sure you have ruled out common problems and have found the cause
for the problem. You should also have a detailed plan on how to tune the system,
because applying random tuning tips often will not help and could make things
worse.

PROCEDURE 1.1: GENERAL APPROACH WHEN TUNING A SYSTEM

1. Specify the problem that needs to be solved.

2. In case the degradation is new, identify any recent changes to the system.

3. Identify why the issue is considered a performance problem.

4. Specify a metric that can be used to analyze performance. This metric could for example
be latency, throughput, the maximum number of users that are simultaneously logged in,
or the maximum number of active users.

5. Measure current performance using the metric from the previous step.

6. Identify the subsystem(s) where the application is spending the most time.

7.
a. Monitor the system and/or the application.

b. Analyze the data, categorize where time is being spent.

8. Tune the subsystem identified in the previous step.

9. Remeasure the current performance without monitoring using the same metric as before.

10. If performance is still not acceptable, start over with Step 3.

1.1 Be Sure What Problem to Solve

Before starting to tuning a system, try to describe the problem as exactly as possible. A statement
like “The system is slow!” is not a helpful problem description. For example, it could make a
difference whether the system speed needs to be improved in general or only at peak times.

2 Be Sure What Problem to Solve SLED 12 SP3

Furthermore, make sure you can apply a measurement to your problem, otherwise you cannot
verify if the tuning was a success or not. You should always be able to compare “before” and
“after”. Which metrics to use depends on the scenario or application you are looking into. Rel-
evant Web server metrics, for example, could be expressed in terms of:

Latency
The time to deliver a page

Throughput
Number of pages served per second or megabytes transferred per second

Active Users
The maximum number of users that can be downloading pages while still receiving pages
within an acceptable latency

1.2 Rule Out Common Problems

A performance problem often is caused by network or hardware problems, bugs, or configuration
issues. Make sure to rule out problems such as the ones listed below before attempting to tune
your system:

Check the output of the systemd journal (see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter  16
“journalctl: Query the systemd Journal”) for unusual entries.

Check (using top or ps ) whether a certain process misbehaves by eating up unusual

amounts of CPU time or memory.

Check for network problems by inspecting /proc/net/dev .

In case of I/O problems with physical disks, make sure it is not caused by hardware prob-
lems (check the disk with the smartmontools ) or by a full disk.

Ensure that background jobs are scheduled to be carried out in times the server load is
low. Those jobs should also run with low priority (set via nice ).

If the machine runs several services using the same resources, consider moving services
to another server.

Last, make sure your software is up-to-date.

3 Rule Out Common Problems SLED 12 SP3

1.3 Finding the Bottleneck
Finding the bottleneck very often is the hardest part when tuning a system. SUSE Linux En-
terprise Desktop offers many tools to help you with this task. See Part  II, “System Monitoring”
for detailed information on general system monitoring applications and log le analysis. If the
problem requires a long-time in-depth analysis, the Linux kernel offers means to perform such
analysis. See Part III, “Kernel Monitoring” for coverage.
Once you have collected the data, it needs to be analyzed. First, inspect if the server's hardware
(memory, CPU, bus) and its I/O capacities (disk, network) are sufficient. If these basic conditions
are met, the system might benefit from tuning.

1.4 Step-by-step Tuning

Make sure to carefully plan the tuning itself. It is of vital importance to only do one step at a
time. Only by doing so you can measure if the change provided an improvement or even had a
negative impact. Each tuning activity should be measured over a sufficient time period to ensure
you can do an analysis based on significant data. If you cannot measure a positive effect, do not
make the change permanent. Chances are, that it might have a negative effect in the future.

4 Finding the Bottleneck SLED 12 SP3

II System Monitoring

2 System Monitoring Utilities 6

3 Analyzing and Managing System Log Files 55

2 System Monitoring Utilities

There are number of programs, tools, and utilities which you can use to examine
the status of your system. This chapter introduces some and describes their most im-
portant and frequently used parameters.

Note: Gathering and Analyzing System Information with

supportconfig
Apart from the utilities presented in the following, SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop also
contains supportconfig , a tool to create reports about the system such as: current kernel
version, hardware, installed packages, partition setup and much more. These reports are
used to provide the SUSE support with needed information in case a support ticket is
created. However, they can also be analyzed for known issues to help resolve problems
faster. For this purpose, SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop provides both an appliance and
a command line tool for Supportconfig Analysis (SCA). See Book “Administration Guide”,
Chapter 33 “Gathering System Information for Support” for details.

For each of the described commands, examples of the relevant outputs are presented. In the ex-
amples, the rst line is the command itself (after the tux > or root #). Omissions are indicated
with square brackets ( [...] ) and long lines are wrapped where necessary. Line breaks for long
lines are indicated by a backslash ( \ ).

tux > command -x -y

output line 1
output line 2
output line 3 is annoyingly long, so long that \
we need to break it
output line 4
[...]
output line 98
output line 99

The descriptions have been kept short so that we can include as many utilities as possible. Further
information for all the commands can be found in the manual pages. Most of the commands also
understand the parameter --help , which produces a brief list of possible parameters.

6 SLED 12 SP3
2.1 Multi-Purpose Tools
While most Linux system monitoring tools monitor only a single aspect of the system, there are
a few tools with a broader scope. To get an overview and nd out which part of the system to
examine further, use these tools rst.

2.1.1 vmstat
vmstat collects information about processes, memory, I/O, interrupts and CPU. If called without
a sampling rate, it displays average values since the last reboot. When called with a sampling
rate, it displays actual samples:

EXAMPLE 2.1: vmstat OUTPUT ON A LIGHTLY USED MACHINE

tux > vmstat 2

procs -----------memory---------- ---swap-- -----io---- -system-- ------cpu-----
r b swpd free buff cache si so bi bo in cs us sy id wa st
1 0 44264 81520 424 935736 0 0 12 25 27 34 1 0 98 0 0
0 0 44264 81552 424 935736 0 0 0 0 38 25 0 0 100 0 0
0 0 44264 81520 424 935732 0 0 0 0 23 15 0 0 100 0 0
0 0 44264 81520 424 935732 0 0 0 0 36 24 0 0 100 0 0
0 0 44264 81552 424 935732 0 0 0 0 51 38 0 0 100 0 0

EXAMPLE 2.2: vmstat OUTPUT ON A HEAVILY USED MACHINE (CPU BOUND)

tux > vmstat 2

procs -----------memory----------- ---swap-- -----io---- -system-- -----cpu------
r b swpd free buff cache si so bi bo in cs us sy id wa st
32 1 26236 459640 110240 6312648 0 0 9944 2 4552 6597 95 5 0 0 0
23 1 26236 396728 110336 6136224 0 0 9588 0 4468 6273 94 6 0 0 0
35 0 26236 554920 110508 6166508 0 0 7684 27992 4474 4700 95 5 0 0 0
28 0 26236 518184 110516 6039996 0 0 10830 4 4446 4670 94 6 0 0 0
21 5 26236 716468 110684 6074872 0 0 8734 20534 4512 4061 96 4 0 0 0

Tip: First Line of Output

The rst line of the vmstat output always displays average values since the last reboot.

7 Multi-Purpose Tools SLED 12 SP3

The columns show the following:

r
Shows the number of processes in a runnable state. These processes are either executing or
waiting for a free CPU slot. If the number of processes in this column is constantly higher
than the number of CPUs available, this may be an indication of insufficient CPU power.

b
Shows the number of processes waiting for a resource other than a CPU. A high number
in this column may indicate an I/O problem (network or disk).

swpd
The amount of swap space (KB) currently used.

free
The amount of unused memory (KB).

inact
Recently unused memory that can be reclaimed. This column is only visible when calling
vmstat with the parameter -a (recommended).

active
Recently used memory that normally does not get reclaimed. This column is only visible
when calling vmstat with the parameter -a (recommended).

buff
File buer cache (KB) in RAM that contains le system metadata. This column is not visible
when calling vmstat with the parameter -a .

cache
Page cache (KB) in RAM with the actual contents of les. This column is not visible when
calling vmstat with the parameter -a .

si / so
Amount of data (KB) that is moved from swap to RAM ( si ) or from RAM to swap ( so )
per second. High so values over a long period of time may indicate that an application
is leaking memory and the leaked memory is being swapped out. High si values over a
long period of time could mean that an application that was inactive for a very long time
is now active again. Combined high si and so values for prolonged periods of time are
evidence of swap thrashing and may indicate that more RAM needs to be installed in the
system because there is not enough memory to hold the working set size.

8 vmstat SLED 12 SP3

bi
Number of blocks per second received from a block device (for example, a disk read). Note
that swapping also impacts the values shown here. The block size may vary between le
systems but can be determined using the stat utility. If throughput data is required then
iostat may be used.

bo
Number of blocks per second sent to a block device (for example, a disk write). Note that
swapping also impacts the values shown here.

in
Interrupts per second. A high value may indicate a high I/O level (network and/or disk),
but could also be triggered for other reasons such as inter-processor interrupts triggered
by another activity. Make sure to also check /proc/interrupts to identify the source
of interrupts.

cs
Number of context switches per second. This is the number of times that the kernel replaces
executable code of one program in memory with that of another program.

us
Percentage of CPU usage executing application code.

sy
Percentage of CPU usage executing kernel code.

id
Percentage of CPU time spent idling. If this value is zero over a longer time, your CPU(s)
are working to full capacity. This is not necessarily a bad sign—rather refer to the values
in columns r and b to determine if your machine is equipped with sufficient CPU power.

wa
If "wa" time is non-zero, it indicates throughput lost because of waiting for I/O. This may
be inevitable, for example, if a le is being read for the rst time, background writeback
cannot keep up, and so on. It can also be an indicator for a hardware bottleneck (network
or hard disk). Lastly, it can indicate a potential for tuning the virtual memory manager
(refer to Chapter 14, Tuning the Memory Management Subsystem).

st
Percentage of CPU time stolen from a virtual machine.

9 vmstat SLED 12 SP3

See vmstat --help for more options.

2.1.2 dstat
dstat is a replacement for tools such as vmstat , iostat , netstat , or ifstat . dstat dis-
plays information about the system resources in real time. For example, you can compare disk
usage in combination with interrupts from the IDE controller, or compare network bandwidth
with the disk throughput (in the same interval).
By default, its output is presented in readable tables. Alternatively, CSV output can be produced
which is suitable as a spreadsheet import format.
It is written in Python and can be enhanced with plug-ins.
This is the general syntax:

dstat [-afv] [OPTIONS..] [DELAY [COUNT]]

All options and parameters are optional. Without any parameter, dstat displays statistics about
CPU ( -c , --cpu ), disk ( -d , --disk ), network ( -n , --net ), paging ( -g , --page ), and the
interrupts and context switches of the system ( -y , --sys ); it refreshes the output every second
ad infinitum:

root # dstat
You did not select any stats, using -cdngy by default.
----total-cpu-usage---- -dsk/total- -net/total- ---paging-- ---system--
usr sys idl wai hiq siq| read writ| recv send| in out | int csw
0 0 100 0 0 0| 15k 44k| 0 0 | 0 82B| 148 194
0 0 100 0 0 0| 0 0 |5430B 170B| 0 0 | 163 187
0 0 100 0 0 0| 0 0 |6363B 842B| 0 0 | 196 185

-a , --all
equal to -cdngy (default)

-f , --full
expand -C , -D , -I , -N and -S discovery lists

-v , --vmstat
equal to -pmgdsc , -D total

DELAY
delay in seconds between each update

10 dstat SLED 12 SP3

COUNT
the number of updates to display before exiting

The default delay is 1 and the count is unspecified (unlimited).

For more information, see the man page of dstat and its Web page at http://dag.wieer-
s.com/home-made/dstat/ .

2.1.3 System Activity Information: sar

sar can generate extensive reports on almost all important system activities, among them CPU,
memory, IRQ usage, IO, or networking. It can also generate reports on the y. sar gathers all
their data from the /proc le system.

Note: sysstat Package

sar is a part of the sysstat package either with YaST, or with zypper in sysstat .

2.1.3.1 Generating reports with sar

To generate reports on the y, call sar with an interval (seconds) and a count. To generate
reports from les specify a le name with the option -f instead of interval and count. If le
name, interval and count are not specified, sar attempts to generate a report from /var/log/
sa/saDD , where DD stands for the current day. This is the default location to where sadc (the
system activity data collector) writes its data. Query multiple les with multiple -f options.

sar 2 10 # on-the-fly report, 10 times every 2 seconds

sar -f ~/reports/sar_2014_07_17 # queries file sar_2014_07_17
sar # queries file from today in /var/log/sa/
cd /var/log/sa && \
sar -f sa01 -f sa02 # queries files /var/log/sa/0[12]

Find examples for useful sar calls and their interpretation below. For detailed information on
the meaning of each column, refer to the man (1) of sar . Also refer to the man page for more
options and reports— sar offers plenty of them.

11 System Activity Information: sar SLED 12 SP3

2.1.3.1.1 CPU Usage Report: sar

When called with no options, sar shows a basic report about CPU usage. On multi-processor
machines, results for all CPUs are summarized. Use the option -P ALL to also see statistics for
individual CPUs.

root # sar 10 5
Linux 4.4.21-64-default (jupiter) 10/12/16 _x86_64_ (2 CPU)

17:51:29 CPU %user %nice %system %iowait %steal %idle

17:51:39 all 57,93 0,00 9,58 1,01 0,00 31,47
17:51:49 all 32,71 0,00 3,79 0,05 0,00 63,45
17:51:59 all 47,23 0,00 3,66 0,00 0,00 49,11
17:52:09 all 53,33 0,00 4,88 0,05 0,00 41,74
17:52:19 all 56,98 0,00 5,65 0,10 0,00 37,27
Average: all 49,62 0,00 5,51 0,24 0,00 44,62

%iowait displays the percentage of time that the CPU was idle while waiting for an I/O request.
If this value is significantly higher than zero over a longer time, there is a bottleneck in the
I/O system (network or hard disk). If the %idle value is zero over a longer time, your CPU is
working at capacity.

2.1.3.1.2 Memory Usage Report: sar -r

Generate an overall picture of the system memory (RAM) by using the option -r :

root # sar -r 10 5
Linux 4.4.21-64-default (jupiter) 10/12/16 _x86_64_ (2 CPU)

17:55:27 kbmemfree kbmemused %memused kbbuffers kbcached kbcommit %commit kbactive kbinact kbdirty
17:55:37 104232 1834624 94.62 20 627340 2677656 66.24 802052 828024 1744
17:55:47 98584 1840272 94.92 20 624536 2693936 66.65 808872 826932 2012
17:55:57 87088 1851768 95.51 20 605288 2706392 66.95 827260 821304 1588
17:56:07 86268 1852588 95.55 20 599240 2739224 67.77 829764 820888 3036
17:56:17 104260 1834596 94.62 20 599864 2730688 67.56 811284 821584 3164
Average: 96086 1842770 95.04 20 611254 2709579 67.03 815846 823746 2309

The columns kbcommit and %commit show an approximation of the maximum amount of memory
(RAM and swap) that the current workload could need. While kbcommit displays the absolute
number in kilobytes, %commit displays a percentage.

2.1.3.1.3 Paging Statistics Report: sar -B

Use the option -B to display the kernel paging statistics.

12 System Activity Information: sar SLED 12 SP3

root # sar -B 10 5
Linux 4.4.21-64-default (jupiter) 10/12/16 _x86_64_ (2 CPU)

18:23:01 pgpgin/s pgpgout/s fault/s majflt/s pgfree/s pgscank/s pgscand/s pgsteal/s %vmeff
18:23:11 366.80 11.60 542.50 1.10 4354.80 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
18:23:21 0.00 333.30 1522.40 0.00 18132.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
18:23:31 47.20 127.40 1048.30 0.10 11887.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
18:23:41 46.40 2.50 336.10 0.10 7945.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
18:23:51 0.00 583.70 2037.20 0.00 17731.90 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Average: 92.08 211.70 1097.30 0.26 12010.28 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

The majflt/s (major faults per second) column shows how many pages are loaded from disk into
memory. The source of the faults may be le accesses or faults. At times, many major faults are
normal. For example, during application start-up time. If major faults are experienced for the
entire lifetime of the application it may be an indication that there is insufficient main memory,
particularly if combined with large amounts of direct scanning (pgscand/s).
The %vmeff column shows the number of pages scanned (pgscand/s) in relation to the ones being
reused from the main memory cache or the swap cache (pgsteal/s). It is a measurement of the
efficiency of page reclaim. Healthy values are either near 100 (every inactive page swapped out
is being reused) or 0 (no pages have been scanned). The value should not drop below 30.

2.1.3.1.4 Block Device Statistics Report: sar -d

Use the option -d to display the block device (hard disk, optical drive, USB storage device, etc.).
Make sure to use the additional option -p (pretty-print) to make the DEV column readable.

root # sar -d -p 10 5
Linux 4.4.21-64-default (jupiter) 10/12/16 _x86_64_ (2 CPU)

18:46:09 DEV tps rd_sec/s wr_sec/s avgrq-sz avgqu-sz await svctm %util
18:46:19 sda 1.70 33.60 0.00 19.76 0.00 0.47 0.47 0.08
18:46:19 sr0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

18:46:19 DEV tps rd_sec/s wr_sec/s avgrq-sz avgqu-sz await svctm %util
18:46:29 sda 8.60 114.40 518.10 73.55 0.06 7.12 0.93 0.80
18:46:29 sr0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

18:46:29 DEV tps rd_sec/s wr_sec/s avgrq-sz avgqu-sz await svctm %util
18:46:39 sda 40.50 3800.80 454.90 105.08 0.36 8.86 0.69 2.80
18:46:39 sr0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

18:46:39 DEV tps rd_sec/s wr_sec/s avgrq-sz avgqu-sz await svctm %util
18:46:49 sda 1.40 0.00 204.90 146.36 0.00 0.29 0.29 0.04
18:46:49 sr0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

18:46:49 DEV tps rd_sec/s wr_sec/s avgrq-sz avgqu-sz await svctm %util
18:46:59 sda 3.30 0.00 503.80 152.67 0.03 8.12 1.70 0.56
18:46:59 sr0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

13 System Activity Information: sar SLED 12 SP3

Average: DEV tps rd_sec/s wr_sec/s avgrq-sz avgqu-sz await svctm %util
Average: sda 11.10 789.76 336.34 101.45 0.09 8.07 0.77 0.86
Average: sr0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Compare the Average values for tps, rd_sec/s, and wr_sec/s of all disks. Constantly high values in
the svctm and %util columns could be an indication that I/O subsystem is a bottleneck.
If the machine uses multiple disks, then it is best if I/O is interleaved evenly between disks
of equal speed and capacity. It will be necessary to take into account whether the storage has
multiple tiers. Furthermore, if there are multiple paths to storage then consider what the link
saturation will be when balancing how storage is used.

2.1.3.1.5 Network Statistics Reports: sar -n KEYWORD

The option -n lets you generate multiple network related reports. Specify one of the following
keywords along with the -n :

DEV: Generates a statistic report for all network devices

EDEV: Generates an error statistics report for all network devices

NFS: Generates a statistic report for an NFS client

NFSD: Generates a statistic report for an NFS server

SOCK: Generates a statistic report on sockets

ALL: Generates all network statistic reports

2.1.3.2 Visualizing sar Data

sar reports are not always easy to parse for humans. kSar, a Java application visualizing your
sar data, creates easy-to-read graphs. It can even generate PDF reports. kSar takes data gener-
ated on the y and past data from a le. kSar is licensed under the BSD license and is available
from https://sourceforge.net/projects/ksar/ .

14 System Activity Information: sar SLED 12 SP3

2.2 System Information

2.2.1 Device Load Information: iostat

To monitor the system device load, use iostat . It generates reports that can be useful for better
balancing the load between physical disks attached to your system.
To be able to use iostat , install the package sysstat .
The rst iostat report shows statistics collected since the system was booted. Subsequent
reports cover the time since the previous report.

tux > iostat

Linux 4.4.21-64-default (jupiter) 10/12/16 _x86_64_ (4 CPU)

avg-cpu: %user %nice %system %iowait %steal %idle

17.68 4.49 4.24 0.29 0.00 73.31

Device: tps kB_read/s kB_wrtn/s kB_read kB_wrtn

sdb 2.02 36.74 45.73 3544894 4412392
sda 1.05 5.12 13.47 493753 1300276
sdc 0.02 0.14 0.00 13641 37

Invoking iostat in this way will help you nd out whether throughput is different from your
expectation, but not why. Such questions can be better answered by an extended report which
can be generated by invoking iostat -x . Extended reports additionally include, for example,
information on average queue sizes and average wait times. It may also be easier to evaluate
the data if idle block devices are excluded using the -z switch. Find definitions for each of the
displayed column titles in the man page of iostat ( man 1 iostat ).
You can also specify that a certain device should be monitored at specified intervals. For exam-
ple, to generate ve reports at three-second intervals for the device sda , use:

tux > iostat -p sda 3 5

To show statistics of network le systems (NFS), there are two similar utilities:

nfsiostat-sysstat is included with the package sysstat .

nfsiostat is included with the package nfs-client .

15 System Information SLED 12 SP3

2.2.2 Processor Activity Monitoring: mpstat
The utility mpstat examines activities of each available processor. If your system has one
processor only, the global average statistics will be reported.
The timing arguments work the same way as with the iostat command. Entering mpstat 2
5 prints ve reports for all processors in two-second intervals.

root # mpstat 2 5
Linux 4.4.21-64-default (jupiter) 10/12/16 _x86_64_ (2 CPU)

13:51:10 CPU %usr %nice %sys %iowait %irq %soft %steal %guest %gnice %idle
13:51:12 all 8,27 0,00 0,50 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 91,23
13:51:14 all 46,62 0,00 3,01 0,00 0,00 0,25 0,00 0,00 0,00 50,13
13:51:16 all 54,71 0,00 3,82 0,00 0,00 0,51 0,00 0,00 0,00 40,97
13:51:18 all 78,77 0,00 5,12 0,00 0,00 0,77 0,00 0,00 0,00 15,35
13:51:20 all 51,65 0,00 4,30 0,00 0,00 0,51 0,00 0,00 0,00 43,54
Average: all 47,85 0,00 3,34 0,00 0,00 0,40 0,00 0,00 0,00 48,41

From the mpstat data, you can see:

The ratio between the %usr and %sys. For example, a ratio of 10:1 indicates the workload
is mostly running application code and analysis should focus on the application. A ratio
of 1:10 indicates the workload is mostly kernel-bound and tuning the kernel is worth
considering. Alternatively, determine why the application is kernel-bound and see if that
can be alleviated.

Whether there is a subset of CPUs that are nearly fully utilized even if the system is lightly
loaded overall. Few hot CPUs can indicate that the workload is not parallelized and could
benefit from executing on a machine with a smaller number of faster processors.

2.2.3 Processor Frequency Monitoring: turbostat

turbostat shows frequencies, load, temperature, and power of AMD64/Intel 64 processors.
It can operate in two modes: If called with a command, the command process is forked and
statistics are displayed upon command completion. When run without a command, it will display
updated statistics every ve seconds. Note that turbostat requires the kernel module msr to
be loaded.

tux > sudo turbostat find /etc -type d -exec true {} \;

0.546880 sec
CPU Avg_MHz Busy% Bzy_MHz TSC_MHz
- 416 28.43 1465 3215
0 631 37.29 1691 3215

16 Processor Activity Monitoring: mpstat SLED 12 SP3

 1 416 27.14 1534 3215
2 270 24.30 1113 3215
3 406 26.57 1530 3214
4 505 32.46 1556 3214
5 270 22.79 1184 3214

The output depends on the CPU type and may vary. To display more details such as temperature
and power, use the --debug option. For more command line options and an explanation of the
eld descriptions, refer to man 8 turbostat .

2.2.4 Task Monitoring: pidstat

If you need to see what load a particular task applies to your system, use pidstat command. It
prints activity of every selected task or all tasks managed by Linux kernel if no task is specified.
You can also set the number of reports to be displayed and the time interval between them.
For example, pidstat -C firefox 2 3 prints the load statistic for tasks whose command name
includes the string “firefox”. There will be three reports printed at two second intervals.

root # pidstat -C firefox 2 3

Linux 4.4.21-64-default (jupiter) 10/12/16 _x86_64_ (2 CPU)

14:09:11 UID PID %usr %system %guest %CPU CPU Command

14:09:13 1000 387 22,77 0,99 0,00 23,76 1 firefox

14:09:13 UID PID %usr %system %guest %CPU CPU Command

14:09:15 1000 387 46,50 3,00 0,00 49,50 1 firefox

14:09:15 UID PID %usr %system %guest %CPU CPU Command

14:09:17 1000 387 60,50 7,00 0,00 67,50 1 firefox

Average: UID PID %usr %system %guest %CPU CPU Command

Average: 1000 387 43,19 3,65 0,00 46,84 - firefox

Similarly, pidstat -d can be used to estimate how much I/O tasks are doing, whether they
are sleeping on that I/O and how many clock ticks the task was stalled.

2.2.5 Kernel Ring Buffer: dmesg

The Linux kernel keeps certain messages in a ring buer. To view these messages, enter the
command dmesg -T .

17 Task Monitoring: pidstat SLED 12 SP3

Older events are logged in the systemd journal. See Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter  16
“journalctl: Query the systemd Journal” for more information on the journal.

2.2.6 List of Open Files: lsof

To view a list of all the les open for the process with process ID PID , use -p . For example,
to view all the les used by the current shell, enter:

root # lsof -p $$
COMMAND PID USER FD TYPE DEVICE SIZE/OFF NODE NAME
bash 8842 root cwd DIR 0,32 222 6772 /root
bash 8842 root rtd DIR 0,32 166 256 /
bash 8842 root txt REG 0,32 656584 31066 /bin/bash
bash 8842 root mem REG 0,32 1978832 22993 /lib64/libc-2.19.so
[...]
bash 8842 root 2u CHR 136,2 0t0 5 /dev/pts/2
bash 8842 root 255u CHR 136,2 0t0 5 /dev/pts/2

The special shell variable $$ , whose value is the process ID of the shell, has been used.
When used with -i , lsof lists currently open Internet les as well:

root # lsof -i
COMMAND PID USER FD TYPE DEVICE SIZE/OFF NODE NAME
wickedd-d 917 root 8u IPv4 16627 0t0 UDP *:bootpc
wickedd-d 918 root 8u IPv6 20752 0t0 UDP [fe80::5054:ff:fe72:5ead]:dhcpv6-client
sshd 3152 root 3u IPv4 18618 0t0 TCP *:ssh (LISTEN)
sshd 3152 root 4u IPv6 18620 0t0 TCP *:ssh (LISTEN)
master 4746 root 13u IPv4 20588 0t0 TCP localhost:smtp (LISTEN)
master 4746 root 14u IPv6 20589 0t0 TCP localhost:smtp (LISTEN)
sshd 8837 root 5u IPv4 293709 0t0 TCP jupiter.suse.de:ssh->venus.suse.de:33619 (ESTABLISHED)
sshd 8837 root 9u IPv6 294830 0t0 TCP localhost:x11 (LISTEN)
sshd 8837 root 10u IPv4 294831 0t0 TCP localhost:x11 (LISTEN)

2.2.7 Kernel and udev Event Sequence Viewer: udevadm monitor

udevadm monitor listens to the kernel uevents and events sent out by a udev rule and prints
the device path (DEVPATH) of the event to the console. This is a sequence of events while
connecting a USB memory stick:

Note: Monitoring udev Events

Only root user is allowed to monitor udev events by running the udevadm command.

18 List of Open Files: lsof SLED 12 SP3

UEVENT[1138806687] add@/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.7/usb4/4-2/4-2.2
UEVENT[1138806687] add@/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.7/usb4/4-2/4-2.2/4-2.2
UEVENT[1138806687] add@/class/scsi_host/host4
UEVENT[1138806687] add@/class/usb_device/usbdev4.10
UDEV [1138806687] add@/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.7/usb4/4-2/4-2.2
UDEV [1138806687] add@/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.7/usb4/4-2/4-2.2/4-2.2
UDEV [1138806687] add@/class/scsi_host/host4
UDEV [1138806687] add@/class/usb_device/usbdev4.10
UEVENT[1138806692] add@/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.7/usb4/4-2/4-2.2/4-2.2
UEVENT[1138806692] add@/block/sdb
UEVENT[1138806692] add@/class/scsi_generic/sg1
UEVENT[1138806692] add@/class/scsi_device/4:0:0:0
UDEV [1138806693] add@/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.7/usb4/4-2/4-2.2/4-2.2
UDEV [1138806693] add@/class/scsi_generic/sg1
UDEV [1138806693] add@/class/scsi_device/4:0:0:0
UDEV [1138806693] add@/block/sdb
UEVENT[1138806694] add@/block/sdb/sdb1
UDEV [1138806694] add@/block/sdb/sdb1
UEVENT[1138806694] mount@/block/sdb/sdb1
UEVENT[1138806697] umount@/block/sdb/sdb1

2.3 Processes

2.3.1 Interprocess Communication: ipcs

The command ipcs produces a list of the IPC resources currently in use:

root # ipcs
------ Message Queues --------
key msqid owner perms used-bytes messages

------ Shared Memory Segments --------

key shmid owner perms bytes nattch status
0x00000000 65536 tux 600 524288 2 dest
0x00000000 98305 tux 600 4194304 2 dest
0x00000000 884738 root 600 524288 2 dest
0x00000000 786435 tux 600 4194304 2 dest
0x00000000 12058628 tux 600 524288 2 dest
0x00000000 917509 root 600 524288 2 dest
0x00000000 12353542 tux 600 196608 2 dest
0x00000000 12451847 tux 600 524288 2 dest
0x00000000 11567114 root 600 262144 1 dest
0x00000000 10911763 tux 600 2097152 2 dest

19 Processes SLED 12 SP3

0x00000000 11665429 root 600 2336768 2 dest
0x00000000 11698198 root 600 196608 2 dest
0x00000000 11730967 root 600 524288 2 dest

------ Semaphore Arrays --------

key semid owner perms nsems
0xa12e0919 32768 tux 666 2

2.3.2 Process List: ps

The command ps produces a list of processes. Most parameters must be written without a minus
sign. Refer to ps --help for a brief help or to the man page for extensive help.
To list all processes with user and command line information, use ps axu :

tux > ps axu

USER PID %CPU %MEM VSZ RSS TTY STAT START TIME COMMAND
root 1 0.0 0.3 34376 4608 ? Ss Jul24 0:02 /usr/lib/systemd/systemd
root 2 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S Jul24 0:00 [kthreadd]
root 3 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S Jul24 0:00 [ksoftirqd/0]
root 5 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S< Jul24 0:00 [kworker/0:0H]
root 6 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S Jul24 0:00 [kworker/u2:0]
root 7 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S Jul24 0:00 [migration/0]
[...]
tux 12583 0.0 0.1 185980 2720 ? Sl 10:12 0:00 /usr/lib/gvfs/gvfs-mtp-volume-monitor
tux 12587 0.0 0.1 198132 3044 ? Sl 10:12 0:00 /usr/lib/gvfs/gvfs-gphoto2-volume-monitor
tux 12591 0.0 0.1 181940 2700 ? Sl 10:12 0:00 /usr/lib/gvfs/gvfs-goa-volume-monitor
tux 12594 8.1 10.6 1418216 163564 ? Sl 10:12 0:03 /usr/bin/gnome-shell
tux 12600 0.0 0.3 393448 5972 ? Sl 10:12 0:00 /usr/lib/gnome-settings-daemon-3.0/gsd-
printer
tux 12625 0.0 0.6 227776 10112 ? Sl 10:12 0:00 /usr/lib/gnome-control-center-search-
provider
tux 12626 0.5 1.5 890972 23540 ? Sl 10:12 0:00 /usr/bin/nautilus --no-default-window
[...]

To check how many sshd processes are running, use the option -p together with the command
pidof , which lists the process IDs of the given processes.

tux > ps -p $(pidof sshd)

PID TTY STAT TIME COMMAND
1545 ? Ss 0:00 /usr/sbin/sshd -D
4608 ? Ss 0:00 sshd: root@pts/0

The process list can be formatted according to your needs. The option L returns a list of all
keywords. Enter the following command to issue a list of all processes sorted by memory usage:

tux > ps ax --format pid,rss,cmd --sort rss

PID RSS CMD

20 Process List: ps SLED 12 SP3

 PID RSS CMD
2 0 [kthreadd]
3 0 [ksoftirqd/0]
4 0 [kworker/0:0]
5 0 [kworker/0:0H]
6 0 [kworker/u2:0]
7 0 [migration/0]
8 0 [rcu_bh]
[...]
12518 22996 /usr/lib/gnome-settings-daemon-3.0/gnome-settings-daemon
12626 23540 /usr/bin/nautilus --no-default-window
12305 32188 /usr/bin/Xorg :0 -background none -verbose
12594 164900 /usr/bin/gnome-shell

USEFUL ps CALLS

ps aux --sort COLUMN

Sort the output by COLUMN . Replace COLUMN with

pmem for physical memory ratio

pcpu for CPU ratio
rss for resident set size (non-swapped physical memory)

ps axo pid,%cpu,rss,vsz,args,wchan
Shows every process, their PID, CPU usage ratio, memory size (resident and virtual), name,
and their syscall.

ps axfo pid,args
Show a process tree.

2.3.3 Process Tree: pstree

The command pstree produces a list of processes in the form of a tree:

tux > pstree

systemd---accounts-daemon---{gdbus}
| |-{gmain}
|-at-spi-bus-laun---dbus-daemon
| |-{dconf worker}
| |-{gdbus}
| |-{gmain}
|-at-spi2-registr---{gdbus}
|-cron

21 Process Tree: pstree SLED 12 SP3

 |-2*[dbus-daemon]
|-dbus-launch
|-dconf-service---{gdbus}
| |-{gmain}
|-gconfd-2
|-gdm---gdm-simple-slav---Xorg
| | |-gdm-session-wor---gnome-session---gnome-setti+
| | | | |-gnome-shell+++
| | | | |-{dconf work+
| | | | |-{gdbus}
| | | | |-{gmain}
| | | |-{gdbus}
| | | |-{gmain}
| | |-{gdbus}
| | |-{gmain}
| |-{gdbus}
| |-{gmain}
[...]

The parameter -p adds the process ID to a given name. To have the command lines displayed
as well, use the -a parameter:

2.3.4 Table of Processes: top

The command top (an abbreviation of “table of processes”) displays a list of processes that
is refreshed every two seconds. To terminate the program, press Q . The parameter -n 1
terminates the program after a single display of the process list. The following is an example
output of the command top -n 1 :

tux > top -n 1

Tasks: 128 total, 1 running, 127 sleeping, 0 stopped, 0 zombie
%Cpu(s): 2.4 us, 1.2 sy, 0.0 ni, 96.3 id, 0.1 wa, 0.0 hi, 0.0 si, 0.0 st
KiB Mem: 1535508 total, 699948 used, 835560 free, 880 buffers
KiB Swap: 1541116 total, 0 used, 1541116 free. 377000 cached Mem

PID USER PR NI VIRT RES SHR S %CPU %MEM TIME+ COMMAND

1 root 20 0 116292 4660 2028 S 0.000 0.303 0:04.45 systemd
2 root 20 0 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 kthreadd
3 root 20 0 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.07 ksoftirqd+
5 root 0 -20 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 kworker/0+
6 root 20 0 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 kworker/u+
7 root rt 0 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 migration+
8 root 20 0 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 rcu_bh
9 root 20 0 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.24 rcu_sched

22 Table of Processes: top SLED 12 SP3

 10 root rt 0 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.01 watchdog/0
11 root 0 -20 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 khelper
12 root 20 0 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 kdevtmpfs
13 root 0 -20 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 netns
14 root 0 -20 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 writeback
15 root 0 -20 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 kintegrit+
16 root 0 -20 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 bioset
17 root 0 -20 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 crypto
18 root 0 -20 0 0 0 S 0.000 0.000 0:00.00 kblockd

By default the output is sorted by CPU usage (column %CPU, shortcut Shift – P ). Use the
following key combinations to change the sort eld:

Shift – M : Resident Memory (RES)

Shift – N : Process ID (PID)
Shift – T : Time (TIME+)
To use any other eld for sorting, press F and select a eld from the list. To toggle the sort
order, Use Shift –R .
The parameter -U UID monitors only the processes associated with a particular user. Replace
UID with the user ID of the user. Use top -U $(id -u) to show processes of the current user

2.3.5 z Systems Hypervisor Monitor: hyptop

hyptop provides a dynamic real-time view of a z Systems hypervisor environment, using the
kernel infrastructure via debugfs. It works with either the z/VM or the LPAR hypervisor. De-
pending on the available data it, for example, shows CPU and memory consumption of active
LPARs or z/VM guests. It provides a curses based user interface similar to the top command.
hyptop provides two windows:

sys_list: Lists systems that the currently hypervisor is running

sys: Shows one system in more detail

You can run hyptop in interactive mode (default) or in batch mode with the -b option. Help
in the interactive mode is available by pressing ? after hyptop is started.
Output for the sys_list window under LPAR:

12:30:48 | CPU-T: IFL(18) CP(3) UN(3) ?=help

system #cpu cpu mgm Cpu+ Mgm+ online
(str) (#) (%) (%) (hm) (hm) (dhm)

23 z Systems Hypervisor Monitor: hyptop SLED 12 SP3

H05LP30 10 461.14 10.18 1547:41 8:15 11:05:59
H05LP33 4 133.73 7.57 220:53 6:12 11:05:54
H05LP50 4 99.26 0.01 146:24 0:12 10:04:24
H05LP02 1 99.09 0.00 269:57 0:00 11:05:58
TRX2CFA 1 2.14 0.03 3:24 0:04 11:06:01
H05LP13 6 1.36 0.34 4:23 0:54 11:05:56
TRX1 19 1.22 0.14 13:57 0:22 11:06:01
TRX2 20 1.16 0.11 26:05 0:25 11:06:00
H05LP55 2 0.00 0.00 0:22 0:00 11:05:52
H05LP56 3 0.00 0.00 0:00 0:00 11:05:52
413 823.39 23.86 3159:57 38:08 11:06:01

Output for the "sys_list" window under z/VM:

12:32:21 | CPU-T: UN(16) ?=help

system #cpu cpu Cpu+ online memuse memmax wcur
(str) (#) (%) (hm) (dhm) (GiB) (GiB) (#)
T6360004 6 100.31 959:47 53:05:20 1.56 2.00 100
T6360005 2 0.44 1:11 3:02:26 0.42 0.50 100
T6360014 2 0.27 0:45 10:18:41 0.54 0.75 100
DTCVSW1 1 0.00 0:00 53:16:42 0.01 0.03 100
T6360002 6 0.00 166:26 40:19:18 1.87 2.00 100
OPERATOR 1 0.00 0:00 53:16:42 0.00 0.03 100
T6360008 2 0.00 0:37 30:22:55 0.32 0.75 100
T6360003 6 0.00 3700:57 53:03:09 4.00 4.00 100
NSLCF1 1 0.00 0:02 53:16:41 0.03 0.25 500
EREP 1 0.00 0:00 53:16:42 0.00 0.03 100
PERFSVM 1 0.00 0:53 2:21:12 0.04 0.06 0
TCPIP 1 0.00 0:01 53:16:42 0.01 0.12 3000
DATAMOVE 1 0.00 0:05 53:16:42 0.00 0.03 100
DIRMAINT 1 0.00 0:04 53:16:42 0.01 0.03 100
DTCVSW2 1 0.00 0:00 53:16:42 0.01 0.03 100
RACFVM 1 0.00 0:00 53:16:42 0.01 0.02 100
75 101.57 5239:47 53:16:42 15.46 22.50 3000

Output for the sys window under LPAR:

14:08:41 | H05LP30 | CPU-T: IFL(18) CP(3) UN(3) ? = help

cpuid type cpu mgm visual.
(#) (str) (%) (%) (vis)
0 IFL 96.91 1.96 |############################################ |
1 IFL 81.82 1.46 |##################################### |
2 IFL 88.00 2.43 |######################################## |
3 IFL 92.27 1.29 |########################################## |
4 IFL 83.32 1.05 |##################################### |
5 IFL 92.46 2.59 |########################################## |
6 IFL 0.00 0.00 | |

24 z Systems Hypervisor Monitor: hyptop SLED 12 SP3

7 IFL 0.00 0.00 | |
8 IFL 0.00 0.00 | |
9 IFL 0.00 0.00 | |
534.79 10.78

Output for the sys window under z/VM:

15:46:57 | T6360003 | CPU-T: UN(16) ? = help

cpuid cpu visual
(#) (%) (vis)
0 548.72 |######################################### |
548.72

2.3.6 A top-like I/O Monitor: iotop

The iotop utility displays a table of I/O usage by processes or threads.

Note: Installing iotop

iotop is not installed by default. You need to install it manually with zypper in iotop
as root .

iotop displays columns for the I/O bandwidth read and written by each process during the
sampling period. It also displays the percentage of time the process spent while swapping in
and while waiting on I/O. For each process, its I/O priority (class/level) is shown. In addition,
the total I/O bandwidth read and written during the sampling period is displayed at the top
of the interface.

The ← and → keys change the sorting.

R reverses the sort order.

O toggles between showing all processes and threads (default view) and showing only
those doing I/O. (This function is similar to adding --only on command line.)

P toggles between showing threads (default view) and processes. (This function is similar
to --only .)

A toggles between showing the current I/O bandwidth (default view) and accumulated
I/O operations since iotop was started. (This function is similar to --accumulated .)

25 A top-like I/O Monitor: iotop SLED 12 SP3

 I lets you change the priority of a thread or a process's threads.

Q quits iotop .

Pressing any other key will force a refresh.

Following is an example output of the command iotop --only , while find and emacs are
running:

root # iotop --only

Total DISK READ: 50.61 K/s | Total DISK WRITE: 11.68 K/s
TID PRIO USER DISK READ DISK WRITE SWAPIN IO> COMMAND
3416 be/4 tux 50.61 K/s 0.00 B/s 0.00 % 4.05 % find /
275 be/3 root 0.00 B/s 3.89 K/s 0.00 % 2.34 % [jbd2/sda2-8]
5055 be/4 tux 0.00 B/s 3.89 K/s 0.00 % 0.04 % emacs

iotop can be also used in a batch mode ( -b ) and its output stored in a le for later analysis.
For a complete set of options, see the manual page ( man 8 iotop ).

2.3.7 Modify a process's niceness: nice and renice

The kernel determines which processes require more CPU time than others by the process's nice
level, also called niceness. The higher the “nice” level of a process is, the less CPU time it will
take from other processes. Nice levels range from -20 (the least “nice” level) to 19. Negative
values can only be set by root .
Adjusting the niceness level is useful when running a non time-critical process that lasts long
and uses large amounts of CPU time. For example, compiling a kernel on a system that also
performs other tasks. Making such a process “nicer”, ensures that the other tasks, for example
a Web server, will have a higher priority.
Calling nice without any parameters prints the current niceness:

tux > nice

0

Running nice COMMAND increments the current nice level for the given command by 10. Using
nice -n LEVEL COMMAND lets you specify a new niceness relative to the current one.

To change the niceness of a running process, use renice PRIORITY -p PROCESS_ID , for ex-
ample:

tux > renice +5 3266

26 Modify a process's niceness: nice and renice SLED 12 SP3

To renice all processes owned by a specific user, use the option -u USER . Process groups are
reniced by the option -g PROCESS_GROUP_ID .

2.4 Memory

2.4.1 Memory Usage: free

The utility free examines RAM and swap usage. Details of both free and used memory and
swap areas are shown:

tux > free

total used free shared buffers cached
Mem: 32900500 32703448 197052 0 255668 5787364
-/+ buffers/cache: 26660416 6240084
Swap: 2046972 304680 1742292

The options -b , -k , -m , -g show the output in bytes, KB, MB, or GB, respectively. The para-
meter -s delay ensures that the display is refreshed every DELAY seconds. For example, free
-s 1.5 produces an update every 1.5 seconds.

2.4.2 Detailed Memory Usage: /proc/meminfo

Use /proc/meminfo to get more detailed information on memory usage than with free . Ac-
tually free uses some data from this le. See an example output from a 64-bit system below.
Note that it slightly differs on 32-bit systems because of different memory management:

MemTotal: 1942636 kB
MemFree: 1294352 kB
MemAvailable: 1458744 kB
Buffers: 876 kB
Cached: 278476 kB
SwapCached: 0 kB
Active: 368328 kB
Inactive: 199368 kB
Active(anon): 288968 kB
Inactive(anon): 10568 kB
Active(file): 79360 kB
Inactive(file): 188800 kB

27 Memory SLED 12 SP3

Unevictable: 80 kB
Mlocked: 80 kB
SwapTotal: 2103292 kB
SwapFree: 2103292 kB
Dirty: 44 kB
Writeback: 0 kB
AnonPages: 288592 kB
Mapped: 70444 kB
Shmem: 11192 kB
Slab: 40916 kB
SReclaimable: 17712 kB
SUnreclaim: 23204 kB
KernelStack: 2000 kB
PageTables: 10996 kB
NFS_Unstable: 0 kB
Bounce: 0 kB
WritebackTmp: 0 kB
CommitLimit: 3074608 kB
Committed_AS: 1407208 kB
VmallocTotal: 34359738367 kB
VmallocUsed: 145996 kB
VmallocChunk: 34359588844 kB
HardwareCorrupted: 0 kB
AnonHugePages: 86016 kB
HugePages_Total: 0
HugePages_Free: 0
HugePages_Rsvd: 0
HugePages_Surp: 0
Hugepagesize: 2048 kB
DirectMap4k: 79744 kB
DirectMap2M: 2017280 kB

These entries stand for the following:

MemTotal
Total amount of RAM.

MemFree
Amount of unused RAM.

MemAvailable
Estimate of how much memory is available for starting new applications without swapping.

Buffers
File buer cache in RAM containing le system metadata.

28 Detailed Memory Usage: /proc/meminfo SLED 12 SP3

Cached
Page cache in RAM. This excludes buer cache and swap cache, but includes Shmem mem-
ory.

SwapCached
Page cache for swapped-out memory.

Active, Active(anon), Active(file)

Recently used memory that will not be reclaimed unless necessary or on explicit request.
Active is the sum of Active(anon) and Active(file):

Active(anon) tracks swap-backed memory. This includes private and shared anony-
mous mappings and private le pages after copy-on-write.

Active(file) tracks other le system backed memory.

Inactive, Inactive(anon), Inactive(file)

Less recently used memory that will usually be reclaimed rst. Inactive is the sum of Inac-
tive(anon) and Inactive(file):

Inactive(anon) tracks swap backed memory. This includes private and shared anony-
mous mappings and private le pages after copy-on-write.

Inactive(file) tracks other le system backed memory.

Unevictable
Amount of memory that cannot be reclaimed (for example, because it is Mlocked or used
as a RAM disk).

Mlocked
Amount of memory that is backed by the mlock system call. mlock allows processes to
define which part of physical RAM their virtual memory should be mapped to. However,
mlock does not guarantee this placement.

SwapTotal
Amount of swap space.

SwapFree
Amount of unused swap space.

29 Detailed Memory Usage: /proc/meminfo SLED 12 SP3

Dirty
Amount of memory waiting to be written to disk, because it contains changes compared to
the backing storage. Dirty data can be explicitly synchronized either by the application or
by the kernel after a short delay. A large amount of dirty data may take considerable time
to write to disk resulting in stalls. The total amount of dirty data that can exist at any time
can be controlled with the sysctl parameters vm.dirty_ratio or vm.dirty_bytes
(refer to Section 14.1.5, “Writeback” for more details).

Writeback
Amount of memory that is currently being written to disk.

Mapped
Memory claimed with the mmap system call.

Shmem
Memory shared between groups of processes, such as IPC data, tmpfs data, and shared
anonymous memory.

Slab
Memory allocation for internal data structures of the kernel.

SReclaimable
Slab section that can be reclaimed, such as caches (inode, dentry, etc.).

SUnreclaim
Slab section that cannot be reclaimed.

KernelStack
Amount of kernel space memory used by applications (through system calls).

PageTables
Amount of memory dedicated to page tables of all processes.

NFS_Unstable
NFS pages that have already been sent to the server, but are not yet committed there.

Bounce
Memory used for bounce buers of block devices.

WritebackTmp
Memory used by FUSE for temporary writeback buers.

30 Detailed Memory Usage: /proc/meminfo SLED 12 SP3

CommitLimit
Amount of memory available to the system based on the overcommit ratio setting. This is
only enforced if strict overcommit accounting is enabled.

Committed_AS
An approximation of the total amount of memory (RAM and swap) that the current work-
load would need in the worst case.

VmallocTotal
Amount of allocated kernel virtual address space.

VmallocUsed
Amount of used kernel virtual address space.

VmallocChunk
The largest contiguous block of available kernel virtual address space.

HardwareCorrupted
Amount of failed memory (can only be detected when using ECC RAM).

AnonHugePages
Anonymous hugepages that are mapped into user space page tables. These are allocated
transparently for processes without being specifically requested, therefore they are also
known as transparent hugepages (THP).

HugePages_Total
Number of preallocated hugepages for use by SHM_HUGETLB and MAP_HUGETLB or through
the hugetlbfs le system, as defined in /proc/sys/vm/nr_hugepages .

HugePages_Free
Number of hugepages available.

HugePages_Rsvd
Number of hugepages that are committed.

HugePages_Surp
Number of hugepages available beyond HugePages_Total (“surplus”), as defined in /proc/
sys/vm/nr_overcommit_hugepages .

Hugepagesize
Size of a hugepage—on AMD64/Intel 64 the default is 2048 KB.

31 Detailed Memory Usage: /proc/meminfo SLED 12 SP3

DirectMap4k etc.
Amount of kernel memory that is mapped to pages with a given size (in the example: 4 kB).

2.4.3 Process Memory Usage: smaps

Exactly determining how much memory a certain process is consuming is not possible with
standard tools like top or ps . Use the smaps subsystem, introduced in kernel 2.6.14, if you
need exact data. It can be found at /proc/PID/smaps and shows you the number of clean
and dirty memory pages the process with the ID PID is using at that time. It differentiates
between shared and private memory, so you can see how much memory the process is using
without including memory shared with other processes. For more information see /usr/src/
linux/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt (requires the package kernel-source to be
installed).
smaps is expensive to read. Therefore it is not recommended to monitor it regularly, but only
when closely monitoring a certain process.

2.5 Networking

Tip: Traffic Shaping

In case the network bandwidth is lower than expected, you should rst check if any traffic
shaping rules are active for your network segment.

2.5.1 Basic Network Diagnostics: ip

ip is a powerful tool to set up and control network interfaces. You can also use it to quickly
view basic statistics about network interfaces of the system. For example, whether the interface
is up or how many errors, dropped packets, or packet collisions there are.
If you run ip with no additional parameter, it displays a help output. To list all network inter-
faces, enter ip addr show (or abbreviated as ip a ). ip addr show up lists only running
network interfaces. ip -s link show DEVICE lists statistics for the specified interface only:

root # ip -s link show br0

6: br0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc noqueue state UP mode DEFAULT
link/ether 00:19:d1:72:d4:30 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

32 Process Memory Usage: smaps SLED 12 SP3

 RX: bytes packets errors dropped overrun mcast
6346104756 9265517 0 10860 0 0
TX: bytes packets errors dropped carrier collsns
3996204683 3655523 0 0 0 0

ip can also show interfaces ( link ), routing tables ( route ), and much more—refer to man 8
ip for details.

root # ip route
default via 192.168.2.1 dev eth1
192.168.2.0/24 dev eth0 proto kernel scope link src 192.168.2.100
192.168.2.0/24 dev eth1 proto kernel scope link src 192.168.2.101
192.168.2.0/24 dev eth2 proto kernel scope link src 192.168.2.102

root # ip link
1: lo: <LOOPBACK,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 65536 qdisc noqueue state UNKNOWN mode DEFAULT group default
link/loopback 00:00:00:00:00:00 brd 00:00:00:00:00:00
2: eth0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen
1000
link/ether 52:54:00:44:30:51 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
3: eth1: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen
1000
link/ether 52:54:00:a3:c1:fb brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
4: eth2: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc pfifo_fast state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen
1000
link/ether 52:54:00:32:a4:09 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

2.5.2 Show the Network Usage of Processes: nethogs

In some cases, for example if the network traffic suddenly becomes very high, it is desirable to
quickly nd out which application(s) is/are causing the traffic. nethogs , a tool with a design
similar to top , shows incoming and outgoing traffic for all relevant processes:

PID USER PROGRAM DEV SENT RECEIVED

27145 root zypper eth0 5.719 391.749 KB/sec
? root ..0:113:80c0:8080:10:160:0:100:30015 0.102 2.326 KB/sec
26635 tux /usr/lib64/firefox/firefox eth0 0.026 0.026 KB/sec
? root ..0:113:80c0:8080:10:160:0:100:30045 0.000 0.021 KB/sec
? root ..0:113:80c0:8080:10:160:0:100:30045 0.000 0.018 KB/sec
? root ..0:113:80c0:8080:10:160:0:100:30015 0.000 0.018 KB/sec
? root ..0:113:80c0:8080:10:160:0:100:30045 0.000 0.017 KB/sec
? root ..0:113:80c0:8080:10:160:0:100:30045 0.000 0.017 KB/sec
? root ..0:113:80c0:8080:10:160:0:100:30045 0.069 0.000 KB/sec
? root unknown TCP 0.000 0.000 KB/sec

TOTAL 5.916 394.192 KB/sec

33 Show the Network Usage of Processes: nethogs SLED 12 SP3

Like in top , nethogs features interactive commands:

M : cycle between display modes (kb/s, kb, b, mb)

R : sort by RECEIVED
S : sort by SENT
Q : quit

2.5.3 Ethernet Cards in Detail: ethtool

ethtool can display and change detailed aspects of your Ethernet network device. By default
it prints the current setting of the specified device.

root # ethtool eth0

Settings for eth0:
Supported ports: [ TP ]
Supported link modes: 10baseT/Half 10baseT/Full
100baseT/Half 100baseT/Full
1000baseT/Full
Supports auto-negotiation: Yes
Advertised link modes: 10baseT/Half 10baseT/Full
100baseT/Half 100baseT/Full
1000baseT/Full
Advertised pause frame use: No
[...]
Link detected: yes

The following table shows ethtool options that you can use to query the device for specific
information:

TABLE 2.1: LIST OF QUERY OPTIONS OF ethtool

ethtool option it queries the device for

-a pause parameter information

-c interrupt coalescing information

-g Rx/Tx (receive/transmit) ring parameter in-

formation

-i associated driver information

34 Ethernet Cards in Detail: ethtool SLED 12 SP3

 ethtool option it queries the device for

-k offload information

-S NIC and driver-specific statistics

2.5.4 Show the Network Status: ss

ss is a tool to dump socket statistics and replaces the netstat command. To list all connections
use ss without parameters:

root # ss
Netid State Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address:Port Peer Address:Port
u_str ESTAB 0 0 * 14082 * 14083
u_str ESTAB 0 0 * 18582 * 18583
u_str ESTAB 0 0 * 19449 * 19450
u_str ESTAB 0 0 @/tmp/dbus-gmUUwXABPV 18784 * 18783
u_str ESTAB 0 0 /var/run/dbus/system_bus_socket 19383 * 19382
u_str ESTAB 0 0 @/tmp/dbus-gmUUwXABPV 18617 * 18616
u_str ESTAB 0 0 @/tmp/dbus-58TPPDv8qv 19352 * 19351
u_str ESTAB 0 0 * 17658 * 17657
u_str ESTAB 0 0 * 17693 * 17694
[..]

To show all network ports currently open, use the following command:

root # ss -l
Netid State Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address:Port Peer Address:Port
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:4195117 *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:wickedd-auto4/811 *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:wickedd-dhcp4/813 *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:4195121 *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:4195115 *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:wickedd-dhcp6/814 *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:kernel *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:wickedd/817 *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:4195118 *
nl UNCONN 0 0 rtnl:nscd/706 *
nl UNCONN 4352 0 tcpdiag:ss/2381 *
[...]

35 Show the Network Status: ss SLED 12 SP3

When displaying network connections, you can specify the socket type to display: TCP ( -t )
or UDP ( -u ) for example. The -p option shows the PID and name of the program to which
each socket belongs.
The following example lists all TCP connections and the programs using these connections. The
-a option make sure all established connections (listening and non-listening) are shown. The
-p option shows the PID and name of the program to which each socket belongs.

root # ss -t -a -p
State Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address:Port Peer Address:Port
LISTEN 0 128 *:ssh *:* users:(("sshd",1551,3))
LISTEN 0 100 127.0.0.1:smtp *:* users:(("master",1704,13))
ESTAB 0 132 10.120.65.198:ssh 10.120.4.150:55715 users:(("sshd",2103,5))
LISTEN 0 128 :::ssh :::* users:(("sshd",1551,4))
LISTEN 0 100 ::1:smtp :::* users:(("master",1704,14))

2.6 The /proc File System

The /proc le system is a pseudo le system in which the kernel reserves important information
in the form of virtual les. For example, display the CPU type with this command:

tux > cat /proc/cpuinfo

processor : 0
vendor_id : GenuineIntel
cpu family : 6
model : 30
model name : Intel(R) Core(TM) i5 CPU 750 @ 2.67GHz
stepping : 5
microcode : 0x6
cpu MHz : 1197.000
cache size : 8192 KB
physical id : 0
siblings : 4
core id : 0
cpu cores : 4
apicid : 0
initial apicid : 0
fpu : yes
fpu_exception : yes
cpuid level : 11
wp : yes
flags : fpu vme de pse tsc msr pae mce cx8 apic sep mtrr pge mca cmov pat
pse36 clflush dts acpi mmx fxsr sse sse2 ss ht tm pbe syscall nx rdtscp lm constant_tsc
arch_perfmon pebs bts rep_good nopl xtopology nonstop_tsc aperfmperf pni dtes64 monitor

36 The /proc File System SLED 12 SP3

 ds_cpl vmx smx est tm2 ssse3 cx16 xtpr pdcm sse4_1 sse4_2 popcnt lahf_lm ida dtherm
tpr_shadow vnmi flexpriority ept vpid
bogomips : 5333.85
clflush size : 64
cache_alignment : 64
address sizes : 36 bits physical, 48 bits virtual
power management:
[...]

Tip: Detailed Processor Information

Detailed information about the processor on the AMD64/Intel  64 architecture is also
available by running x86info .

Query the allocation and use of interrupts with the following command:

tux > cat /proc/interrupts

CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3
0: 121 0 0 0 IO-APIC-edge timer
8: 0 0 0 1 IO-APIC-edge rtc0
9: 0 0 0 0 IO-APIC-fasteoi acpi
16: 0 11933 0 0 IO-APIC-fasteoi ehci_hcd:+
18: 0 0 0 0 IO-APIC-fasteoi i801_smbus
19: 0 117978 0 0 IO-APIC-fasteoi ata_piix,+
22: 0 0 3275185 0 IO-APIC-fasteoi enp5s1
23: 417927 0 0 0 IO-APIC-fasteoi ehci_hcd:+
40: 2727916 0 0 0 HPET_MSI-edge hpet2
41: 0 2749134 0 0 HPET_MSI-edge hpet3
42: 0 0 2759148 0 HPET_MSI-edge hpet4
43: 0 0 0 2678206 HPET_MSI-edge hpet5
45: 0 0 0 0 PCI-MSI-edge aerdrv, P+
46: 0 0 0 0 PCI-MSI-edge PCIe PME,+
47: 0 0 0 0 PCI-MSI-edge PCIe PME,+
48: 0 0 0 0 PCI-MSI-edge PCIe PME,+
49: 0 0 0 387 PCI-MSI-edge snd_hda_i+
50: 933117 0 0 0 PCI-MSI-edge nvidia
NMI: 2102 2023 2031 1920 Non-maskable interrupts
LOC: 92 71 57 41 Local timer interrupts
SPU: 0 0 0 0 Spurious interrupts
PMI: 2102 2023 2031 1920 Performance monitoring int+
IWI: 47331 45725 52464 46775 IRQ work interrupts
RTR: 2 0 0 0 APIC ICR read retries
RES: 472911 396463 339792 323820 Rescheduling interrupts
CAL: 48389 47345 54113 50478 Function call interrupts
TLB: 28410 26804 24389 26157 TLB shootdowns

37 The /proc File System SLED 12 SP3

TRM: 0 0 0 0 Thermal event interrupts
THR: 0 0 0 0 Threshold APIC interrupts
MCE: 0 0 0 0 Machine check exceptions
MCP: 40 40 40 40 Machine check polls
ERR: 0
MIS: 0

The address assignment of executables and libraries is contained in the maps le:

tux > cat /proc/self/maps

08048000-0804c000 r-xp 00000000 03:03 17753 /bin/cat
0804c000-0804d000 rw-p 00004000 03:03 17753 /bin/cat
0804d000-0806e000 rw-p 0804d000 00:00 0 [heap]
b7d27000-b7d5a000 r--p 00000000 03:03 11867 /usr/lib/locale/en_GB.utf8/
b7d5a000-b7e32000 r--p 00000000 03:03 11868 /usr/lib/locale/en_GB.utf8/
b7e32000-b7e33000 rw-p b7e32000 00:00 0
b7e33000-b7f45000 r-xp 00000000 03:03 8837 /lib/libc-2.3.6.so
b7f45000-b7f46000 r--p 00112000 03:03 8837 /lib/libc-2.3.6.so
b7f46000-b7f48000 rw-p 00113000 03:03 8837 /lib/libc-2.3.6.so
b7f48000-b7f4c000 rw-p b7f48000 00:00 0
b7f52000-b7f53000 r--p 00000000 03:03 11842 /usr/lib/locale/en_GB.utf8/
[...]
b7f5b000-b7f61000 r--s 00000000 03:03 9109 /usr/lib/gconv/gconv-module
b7f61000-b7f62000 r--p 00000000 03:03 9720 /usr/lib/locale/en_GB.utf8/
b7f62000-b7f76000 r-xp 00000000 03:03 8828 /lib/ld-2.3.6.so
b7f76000-b7f78000 rw-p 00013000 03:03 8828 /lib/ld-2.3.6.so
bfd61000-bfd76000 rw-p bfd61000 00:00 0 [stack]
ffffe000-fffff000 ---p 00000000 00:00 0 [vdso]

A lot more information can be obtained from the /proc le system. Some important les and
their contents are:

/proc/devices
Available devices

/proc/modules
Kernel modules loaded

/proc/cmdline
Kernel command line

/proc/meminfo
Detailed information about memory usage

/proc/config.gz
gzip -compressed configuration le of the kernel currently running

38 The /proc File System SLED 12 SP3

/proc/ PID/
Find information about processes currently running in the /proc/ NNN directories, where
NNN is the process ID (PID) of the relevant process. Every process can nd its own char-
acteristics in /proc/self/ .

Further information is available in the text le /usr/src/linux/Documentation/filesys-

tems/proc.txt (this le is available when the package kernel-source is installed).

2.6.1 procinfo
Important information from the /proc le system is summarized by the command procinfo :

tux > procinfo

Linux 3.11.10-17-desktop (geeko@buildhost) (gcc 4.8.1 20130909) #1 4CPU
[jupiter.example.com]

Memory: Total Used Free Shared Buffers Cached

Mem: 8181908 8000632 181276 0 85472 2850872
Swap: 10481660 1576 10480084

Bootup: Mon Jul 28 09:54:13 2014 Load average: 1.61 0.85 0.74 2/904 25949

user : 1:54:41.84 12.7% page in : 2107312 disk 1: 52212r 20199w

nice : 0:00:00.46 0.0% page out: 1714461 disk 2: 19387r 10928w
system: 0:25:38.00 2.8% page act: 466673 disk 3: 548r 10w
IOwait: 0:04:16.45 0.4% page dea: 272297
hw irq: 0:00:00.42 0.0% page flt: 105754526
sw irq: 0:01:26.48 0.1% swap in : 0
idle : 12:14:43.65 81.5% swap out: 394
guest : 0:02:18.59 0.2%
uptime: 3:45:22.24 context : 99809844

irq 0: 121 timer irq 41: 3238224 hpet3

irq 8: 1 rtc0 irq 42: 3251898 hpet4
irq 9: 0 acpi irq 43: 3156368 hpet5
irq 16: 14589 ehci_hcd:usb1 irq 45: 0 aerdrv, PCIe PME
irq 18: 0 i801_smbus irq 46: 0 PCIe PME, pciehp
irq 19: 124861 ata_piix, ata_piix, f irq 47: 0 PCIe PME, pciehp
irq 22: 3742817 enp5s1 irq 48: 0 PCIe PME, pciehp
irq 23: 479248 ehci_hcd:usb2 irq 49: 387 snd_hda_intel
irq 40: 3216894 hpet2 irq 50: 1088673 nvidia

To see all the information, use the parameter -a . The parameter -nN produces updates of the
information every N seconds. In this case, terminate the program by pressing Q .

39 procinfo SLED 12 SP3

By default, the cumulative values are displayed. The parameter -d produces the differential
values. procinfo -dn5 displays the values that have changed in the last ve seconds:

2.6.2 System Control Parameters: /proc/sys/

System control parameters are used to modify the Linux kernel parameters at runtime. They
reside in /proc/sys/ and can be viewed and modified with the sysctl command. To list all
parameters, run sysctl -a . A single parameter can be listed with sysctl PARAMETER_NAME .
Parameters are grouped into categories and can be listed with sysctl CATEGORY or by listing
the contents of the respective directories. The most important categories are listed below. The
links to further readings require the installation of the package kernel-source .

sysctl dev (/proc/sys/dev/)

Device-specific information.

sysctl fs (/proc/sys/fs/)
Used le handles, quotas, and other le system-oriented parameters. For details see /usr/
src/linux/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt .

sysctl kernel (/proc/sys/kernel/)

Information about the task scheduler, system shared memory, and other kernel-related
parameters. For details see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt

systctl net (/proc/sys/net/)

Information about network bridges, and general network parameters (mainly the ipv4/
subdirectory). For details see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt

sysctl vm (/proc/sys/vm/)
Entries in this path relate to information about the virtual memory, swapping, and caching.
For details see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt

To set or change a parameter for the current session, use the command sysctl -w PARA-
METER = VALUE . To permanently change a setting, add a line PARAMETER = VALUE to /etc/
sysctl.conf .

40 System Control Parameters: /proc/sys/ SLED 12 SP3

2.7 Hardware Information

2.7.1 PCI Resources: lspci

Note: Accessing PCI configuration.

Most operating systems require root user privileges to grant access to the computer's PCI
configuration.

The command lspci lists the PCI resources:

root # lspci
00:00.0 Host bridge: Intel Corporation 82845G/GL[Brookdale-G]/GE/PE \
DRAM Controller/Host-Hub Interface (rev 01)
00:01.0 PCI bridge: Intel Corporation 82845G/GL[Brookdale-G]/GE/PE \
Host-to-AGP Bridge (rev 01)
00:1d.0 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801DB/DBL/DBM \
(ICH4/ICH4-L/ICH4-M) USB UHCI Controller #1 (rev 01)
00:1d.1 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801DB/DBL/DBM \
(ICH4/ICH4-L/ICH4-M) USB UHCI Controller #2 (rev 01)
00:1d.2 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801DB/DBL/DBM \
(ICH4/ICH4-L/ICH4-M) USB UHCI Controller #3 (rev 01)
00:1d.7 USB Controller: Intel Corporation 82801DB/DBM \
(ICH4/ICH4-M) USB2 EHCI Controller (rev 01)
00:1e.0 PCI bridge: Intel Corporation 82801 PCI Bridge (rev 81)
00:1f.0 ISA bridge: Intel Corporation 82801DB/DBL (ICH4/ICH4-L) \
LPC Interface Bridge (rev 01)
00:1f.1 IDE interface: Intel Corporation 82801DB (ICH4) IDE \
Controller (rev 01)
00:1f.3 SMBus: Intel Corporation 82801DB/DBL/DBM (ICH4/ICH4-L/ICH4-M) \
SMBus Controller (rev 01)
00:1f.5 Multimedia audio controller: Intel Corporation 82801DB/DBL/DBM \
(ICH4/ICH4-L/ICH4-M) AC'97 Audio Controller (rev 01)
01:00.0 VGA compatible controller: Matrox Graphics, Inc. G400/G450 (rev 85)
02:08.0 Ethernet controller: Intel Corporation 82801DB PRO/100 VE (LOM) \
Ethernet Controller (rev 81)

Using -v results in a more detailed listing:

root # lspci -v
[...]
00:03.0 Ethernet controller: Intel Corporation 82540EM Gigabit Ethernet \
Controller (rev 02)

41 Hardware Information SLED 12 SP3

 Subsystem: Intel Corporation PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter
Flags: bus master, 66MHz, medium devsel, latency 64, IRQ 19
Memory at f0000000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=128K]
I/O ports at d010 [size=8]
Capabilities: [dc] Power Management version 2
Capabilities: [e4] PCI-X non-bridge device
Kernel driver in use: e1000
Kernel modules: e1000

Information about device name resolution is obtained from the le /usr/share/pci.ids . PCI
IDs not listed in this le are marked “Unknown device.”
The parameter -vv produces all the information that could be queried by the program. To view
the pure numeric values, use the parameter -n .

2.7.2 USB Devices: lsusb

The command lsusb lists all USB devices. With the option -v , print a more detailed list. The
detailed information is read from the directory /proc/bus/usb/ . The following is the output
of lsusb with these USB devices attached: hub, memory stick, hard disk and mouse.

root # lsusb
Bus 004 Device 007: ID 0ea0:2168 Ours Technology, Inc. Transcend JetFlash \
2.0 / Astone USB Drive
Bus 004 Device 006: ID 04b4:6830 Cypress Semiconductor Corp. USB-2.0 IDE \
Adapter
Bus 004 Device 005: ID 05e3:0605 Genesys Logic, Inc.
Bus 004 Device 001: ID 0000:0000
Bus 003 Device 001: ID 0000:0000
Bus 002 Device 001: ID 0000:0000
Bus 001 Device 005: ID 046d:c012 Logitech, Inc. Optical Mouse
Bus 001 Device 001: ID 0000:0000

2.7.3 Monitoring and Tuning the Thermal Subsystem: tmon

tmon is a tool to help visualize, tune, and test the complex thermal subsystem. When started
without parameters, tmon runs in monitoring mode:

┌──────THERMAL ZONES(SENSORS)──────────────────────────────┐
│Thermal Zones: acpitz00 │
│Trip Points: PC │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
┌─────────── COOLING DEVICES ──────────────────────────────┐

42 USB Devices: lsusb SLED 12 SP3

│ID Cooling Dev Cur Max Thermal Zone Binding │
│00 Processor 0 3 ││││││││││││ │
│01 Processor 0 3 ││││││││││││ │
│02 Processor 0 3 ││││││││││││ │
│03 Processor 0 3 ││││││││││││ │
│04 intel_powerc -1 50 ││││││││││││ │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ 10 20 30 40 │
│acpitz 0:[ 8][>>>>>>>>>P9 C31 │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
┌────────────────── CONTROLS ──────────────────────────────┐
│PID gain: kp=0.36 ki=5.00 kd=0.19 Output 0.00 │
│Target Temp: 65.0C, Zone: 0, Control Device: None │
└──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘

Ctrl-c - Quit TAB - Tuning

For detailed information on how to interpret the data, how to log thermal data and how to use
tmon to test and tune cooling devices and sensors, refer to the man page: man 8 tmon . The
package tmon is not installed by default.

2.7.4 MCELog: Machine Check Exceptions (MCE)

The mcelog package logs and parses/translates Machine Check Exceptions (MCE) on hardware
errors (also including memory errors). Formerly this has been done by a cron job executed
hourly. Now hardware errors are immediately processed by an mcelog daemon.
However, the mcelog service is not enabled by default, resulting in memory and CPU errors also
not being logged by default. In addition, mcelog has a new feature to also handle predictive bad
page offlining and automatic core offlining when cache errors happen.
The service can either be enabled and started via the YaST system services editor or via command
line:

root # systemctl enable mcelog

root # systemctl start mcelog

2.7.5 x86_64: dmidecode: DMI Table Decoder

dmidecode shows the machine's DMI table containing information such as serial numbers and
BIOS revisions of the hardware.

43 MCELog: Machine Check Exceptions (MCE) SLED 12 SP3

root # dmidecode
# dmidecode 2.12
SMBIOS 2.5 present.
27 structures occupying 1298 bytes.
Table at 0x000EB250.

Handle 0x0000, DMI type 4, 35 bytes

Processor Information
Socket Designation: J1PR
Type: Central Processor
Family: Other
Manufacturer: Intel(R) Corporation
ID: E5 06 01 00 FF FB EB BF
Version: Intel(R) Core(TM) i5 CPU 750 @ 2.67GHz
Voltage: 1.1 V
External Clock: 133 MHz
Max Speed: 4000 MHz
Current Speed: 2667 MHz
Status: Populated, Enabled
Upgrade: Other
L1 Cache Handle: 0x0004
L2 Cache Handle: 0x0003
L3 Cache Handle: 0x0001
Serial Number: Not Specified
Asset Tag: Not Specified
Part Number: Not Specified
[..]

2.8 Files and File Systems

2.8.1 Determine the File Type: file

The command file determines the type of a le or a list of les by checking /usr/share/
misc/magic .

tux > file /usr/bin/file

/usr/bin/file: ELF 64-bit LSB executable, x86-64, version 1 (SYSV), \
for GNU/Linux 2.6.4, dynamically linked (uses shared libs), stripped

44 Files and File Systems SLED 12 SP3

The parameter -f LIST specifies a le with a list of le names to examine. The -z allows
file to look inside compressed les:

tux > file /usr/share/man/man1/file.1.gz

/usr/share/man/man1/file.1.gz: gzip compressed data, from Unix, max compression
tux > file -z /usr/share/man/man1/file.1.gz
/usr/share/man/man1/file.1.gz: troff or preprocessor input text \
(gzip compressed data, from Unix, max compression)

The parameter -i outputs a mime type string rather than the traditional description.

tux > file -i /usr/share/misc/magic

/usr/share/misc/magic: text/plain charset=utf-8

2.8.2 File Systems and Their Usage: mount, df and du

The command mount shows which le system (device and type) is mounted at which mount
point:

root # mount
/dev/sda2 on / type ext4 (rw,acl,user_xattr)
proc on /proc type proc (rw)
sysfs on /sys type sysfs (rw)
debugfs on /sys/kernel/debug type debugfs (rw)
devtmpfs on /dev type devtmpfs (rw,mode=0755)
tmpfs on /dev/shm type tmpfs (rw,mode=1777)
devpts on /dev/pts type devpts (rw,mode=0620,gid=5)
/dev/sda3 on /home type ext3 (rw)
securityfs on /sys/kernel/security type securityfs (rw)
fusectl on /sys/fs/fuse/connections type fusectl (rw)
gvfs-fuse-daemon on /home/tux/.gvfs type fuse.gvfs-fuse-daemon \
(rw,nosuid,nodev,user=tux)

Obtain information about total usage of the le systems with the command df . The parameter -
h (or --human-readable ) transforms the output into a form understandable for common users.

tux > df -h
Filesystem Size Used Avail Use% Mounted on
/dev/sda2 20G 5,9G 13G 32% /
devtmpfs 1,6G 236K 1,6G 1% /dev
tmpfs 1,6G 668K 1,6G 1% /dev/shm
/dev/sda3 208G 40G 159G 20% /home

45 File Systems and Their Usage: mount, df and du SLED 12 SP3

Display the total size of all the les in a given directory and its subdirectories with the command
du . The parameter -s suppresses the output of detailed information and gives only a total for
each argument. -h again transforms the output into a human-readable form:

tux > du -sh /opt

192M /opt

2.8.3 Additional Information about ELF Binaries

Read the content of binaries with the readelf utility. This even works with ELF les that were
built for other hardware architectures:

tux > readelf --file-header /bin/ls

ELF Header:
Magic: 7f 45 4c 46 02 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Class: ELF64
Data: 2's complement, little endian
Version: 1 (current)
OS/ABI: UNIX - System V
ABI Version: 0
Type: EXEC (Executable file)
Machine: Advanced Micro Devices X86-64
Version: 0x1
Entry point address: 0x402540
Start of program headers: 64 (bytes into file)
Start of section headers: 95720 (bytes into file)
Flags: 0x0
Size of this header: 64 (bytes)
Size of program headers: 56 (bytes)
Number of program headers: 9
Size of section headers: 64 (bytes)
Number of section headers: 32
Section header string table index: 31

2.8.4 File Properties: stat

The command stat displays le properties:

tux > stat /etc/profile

File: `/etc/profile'
Size: 9662 Blocks: 24 IO Block: 4096 regular file
Device: 802h/2050d Inode: 132349 Links: 1

46 Additional Information about ELF Binaries SLED 12 SP3

Access: (0644/-rw-r--r--) Uid: ( 0/ root) Gid: ( 0/ root)
Access: 2009-03-20 07:51:17.000000000 +0100
Modify: 2009-01-08 19:21:14.000000000 +0100
Change: 2009-03-18 12:55:31.000000000 +0100

The parameter --file-system produces details of the properties of the le system in which
the specified le is located:

tux > stat /etc/profile --file-system

File: "/etc/profile"
ID: d4fb76e70b4d1746 Namelen: 255 Type: ext2/ext3
Block size: 4096 Fundamental block size: 4096
Blocks: Total: 2581445 Free: 1717327 Available: 1586197
Inodes: Total: 655776 Free: 490312

2.9 User Information

2.9.1 User Accessing Files: fuser

It can be useful to determine what processes or users are currently accessing certain les. Sup-
pose, for example, you want to unmount a le system mounted at /mnt . umount returns "de-
vice is busy." The command fuser can then be used to determine what processes are accessing
the device:

tux > fuser -v /mnt/*

USER PID ACCESS COMMAND

/mnt/notes.txt tux 26597 f.... less

Following termination of the less process, which was running on another terminal, the le sys-
tem can successfully be unmounted. When used with -k option, fuser will terminate processes
accessing the le as well.

2.9.2 Who Is Doing What: w

With the command w , nd out who is logged in to the system and what each user is doing.
For example:

tux > w

47 User Information SLED 12 SP3

 16:00:59 up 1 day, 2:41, 3 users, load average: 0.00, 0.01, 0.05
USER TTY FROM LOGIN@ IDLE JCPU PCPU WHAT
tux :0 console Wed13 ?xdm? 8:15 0.03s /usr/lib/gdm/gd
tux console :0 Wed13 26:41m 0.00s 0.03s /usr/lib/gdm/gd
tux pts/0 :0 Wed13 20:11 0.10s 2.89s /usr/lib/gnome-

If any users of other systems have logged in remotely, the parameter -f shows the computers
from which they have established the connection.

2.10 Time and Date

2.10.1 Time Measurement with time

Determine the time spent by commands with the time utility. This utility is available in two
versions: as a Bash built-in and as a program ( /usr/bin/time ).

tux > time find . > /dev/null

real 0m4.051s 1

user 0m0.042s 2

sys 0m0.205s 3

1 The real time that elapsed from the command's start-up until it finished.
2 CPU time of the user as reported by the times system call.
3 CPU time of the system as reported by the times system call.
The output of /usr/bin/time is much more detailed. It is recommended to run it with the -
v switch to produce human-readable output.

/usr/bin/time -v find . > /dev/null

Command being timed: "find ."
User time (seconds): 0.24
System time (seconds): 2.08
Percent of CPU this job got: 25%
Elapsed (wall clock) time (h:mm:ss or m:ss): 0:09.03
Average shared text size (kbytes): 0
Average unshared data size (kbytes): 0
Average stack size (kbytes): 0
Average total size (kbytes): 0
Maximum resident set size (kbytes): 2516

48 Time and Date SLED 12 SP3

 Average resident set size (kbytes): 0
Major (requiring I/O) page faults: 0
Minor (reclaiming a frame) page faults: 1564
Voluntary context switches: 36660
Involuntary context switches: 496
Swaps: 0
File system inputs: 0
File system outputs: 0
Socket messages sent: 0
Socket messages received: 0
Signals delivered: 0
Page size (bytes): 4096
Exit status: 0

2.11 Graph Your Data: RRDtool

There are a lot of data in the world around you, which can be easily measured in time. For
example, changes in the temperature, or the number of data sent or received by your comput-
er's network interface. RRDtool can help you store and visualize such data in detailed and cus-
tomizable graphs.
RRDtool is available for most Unix platforms and Linux distributions. SUSE® Linux Enterprise
Desktop ships RRDtool as well. Install it either with YaST or by entering
zypper install rrdtool in the command line as root .

Tip: Bindings
There are Perl, Python, Ruby, and PHP bindings available for RRDtool, so that you can
write your own monitoring scripts in your preferred scripting language.

2.11.1 How RRDtool Works

RRDtool is an abbreviation of Round Robin Database tool. Round Robin is a method for manipu-
lating with a constant amount of data. It uses the principle of a circular buer, where there is no
end nor beginning to the data row which is being read. RRDtool uses Round Robin Databases
to store and read its data.

49 Graph Your Data: RRDtool SLED 12 SP3

As mentioned above, RRDtool is designed to work with data that change in time. The ideal
case is a sensor which repeatedly reads measured data (like temperature, speed etc.) in constant
periods of time, and then exports them in a given format. Such data are perfectly ready for
RRDtool, and it is easy to process them and create the desired output.
Sometimes it is not possible to obtain the data automatically and regularly. Their format needs
to be pre-processed before it is supplied to RRDtool, and often you need to manipulate RRDtool
even manually.
The following is a simple example of basic RRDtool usage. It illustrates all three important phases
of the usual RRDtool workflow: creating a database, updating measured values, and viewing the
output.

2.11.2 A Practical Example

Suppose we want to collect and view information about the memory usage in the Linux system
as it changes in time. To make the example more vivid, we measure the currently free memory
over a period of 40 seconds in 4-second intervals. Three applications that usually consume a lot
of system memory are started and closed: the Firefox Web browser, the Evolution e-mail client,
and the Eclipse development framework.

2.11.2.1 Collecting Data

RRDtool is very often used to measure and visualize network traffic. In such case, the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used. This protocol can query network devices for
relevant values of their internal counters. Exactly these values are to be stored with RRDtool.
For more information on SNMP, see http://www.net-snmp.org/ .
Our situation is different—we need to obtain the data manually. A helper script free_mem.sh
repetitively reads the current state of free memory and writes it to the standard output.

tux > cat free_mem.sh

INTERVAL=4
for steps in {1..10}
do
DATE=`date +%s`
FREEMEM=`free -b | grep "Mem" | awk '{ print $4 }'`
sleep $INTERVAL
echo "rrdtool update free_mem.rrd $DATE:$FREEMEM"
done

50 A Practical Example SLED 12 SP3

 The time interval is set to 4 seconds, and is implemented with the sleep command.

RRDtool accepts time information in a special format - so called Unix time. It is defined
as the number of seconds since the midnight of January 1, 1970 (UTC). For example,
1272907114 represents 2010-05-03 17:18:34.

The free memory information is reported in bytes with free -b . Prefer to supply basic
units (bytes) instead of multiple units (like kilobytes).

The line with the echo ... command contains the future name of the database le
( free_mem.rrd ), and together creates a command line for updating RRDtool values.

After running free_mem.sh , you see an output similar to this:

tux > sh free_mem.sh

rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974835:1182994432
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974839:1162817536
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974843:1096269824
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974847:1034219520
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974851:909438976
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974855:832454656
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974859:829120512
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974863:1180377088
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974867:1179369472
rrdtool update free_mem.rrd 1272974871:1181806592

It is convenient to redirect the command's output to a le with

sh free_mem.sh > free_mem_updates.log

to simplify its future execution.

2.11.2.2 Creating the Database

Create the initial Robin Round database for our example with the following command:

tux > rrdtool create free_mem.rrd --start 1272974834 --step=4 \

DS:memory:GAUGE:600:U:U RRA:AVERAGE:0.5:1:24

POINTS TO NOTICE

This command creates a le called free_mem.rrd for storing our measured values in a
Round Robin type database.

51 A Practical Example SLED 12 SP3

 The --start option specifies the time (in Unix time) when the rst value will be added to
the database. In this example, it is one less than the rst time value of the free_mem.sh
output (1272974835).

The --step specifies the time interval in seconds with which the measured data will be
supplied to the database.

The DS:memory:GAUGE:600:U:U part introduces a new data source for the database. It
is called memory, its type is gauge, the maximum number between two updates is 600
seconds, and the minimal and maximal value in the measured range are unknown (U).

RRA:AVERAGE:0.5:1:24 creates Round Robin archive (RRA) whose stored data are
processed with the consolidation functions (CF) that calculates the average of data points. 3
arguments of the consolidation function are appended to the end of the line.

If no error message is displayed, then free_mem.rrd database is created in the current directory:

tux > ls -l free_mem.rrd

-rw-r--r-- 1 tux users 776 May 5 12:50 free_mem.rrd

2.11.2.3 Updating Database Values

After the database is created, you need to ll it with the measured data. In Section 2.11.2.1, “Col-
lecting Data”, we already prepared the le free_mem_updates.log which consists of rrdtool
update commands. These commands do the update of database values for us.

tux > sh free_mem_updates.log; ls -l free_mem.rrd

-rw-r--r-- 1 tux users 776 May 5 13:29 free_mem.rrd

As you can see, the size of free_mem.rrd remained the same even after updating its data.

2.11.2.4 Viewing Measured Values

We have already measured the values, created the database, and stored the measured value in
it. Now we can play with the database, and retrieve or view its values.
To retrieve all the values from our database, enter the following on the command line:

tux > rrdtool fetch free_mem.rrd AVERAGE --start 1272974830 \

--end 1272974871
memory

52 A Practical Example SLED 12 SP3

1272974832: nan
1272974836: 1.1729059840e+09
1272974840: 1.1461806080e+09
1272974844: 1.0807572480e+09
1272974848: 1.0030243840e+09
1272974852: 8.9019289600e+08
1272974856: 8.3162112000e+08
1272974860: 9.1693465600e+08
1272974864: 1.1801251840e+09
1272974868: 1.1799787520e+09
1272974872: nan

POINTS TO NOTICE

AVERAGE will fetch average value points from the database, because only one data source
is defined (Section 2.11.2.2, “Creating the Database”) with AVERAGE processing and no other
function is available.

The rst line of the output prints the name of the data source as defined in Section 2.11.2.2,
“Creating the Database”.

The left results column represents individual points in time, while the right one represents
corresponding measured average values in scientific notation.

The nan in the last line stands for “not a number”.

Now a graph representing the values stored in the database is drawn:

tux > rrdtool graph free_mem.png \

--start 1272974830 \
--end 1272974871 \
--step=4 \
DEF:free_memory=free_mem.rrd:memory:AVERAGE \
LINE2:free_memory#FF0000 \
--vertical-label "GB" \
--title "Free System Memory in Time" \
--zoom 1.5 \
--x-grid SECOND:1:SECOND:4:SECOND:10:0:%X

POINTS TO NOTICE

free_mem.png is the le name of the graph to be created.

--start and --end limit the time range within which the graph will be drawn.

--step specifies the time resolution (in seconds) of the graph.

53 A Practical Example SLED 12 SP3

 The DEF:... part is a data definition called free_memory. Its data are read from the
free_mem.rrd database and its data source called memory. The average value points are
calculated, because no others were defined in Section 2.11.2.2, “Creating the Database”.

The LINE... part specifies properties of the line to be drawn into the graph. It is 2 pixels
wide, its data come from the free_memory definition, and its color is red.

--vertical-label sets the label to be printed along the y axis, and --title sets the
main label for the whole graph.

--zoom specifies the zoom factor for the graph. This value must be greater than zero.

--x-grid specifies how to draw grid lines and their labels into the graph. Our example
places them every second, while major grid lines are placed every 4 seconds. Labels are
placed every 10 seconds under the major grid lines.

FIGURE 2.1: EXAMPLE GRAPH CREATED WITH RRDTOOL

2.11.3 For More Information

RRDtool is a very complex tool with a lot of sub-commands and command line options. Some are
easy to understand, but to make it produce the results you want and ne-tune them according
to your liking may require a lot of effort.
Apart from RRDtool's man page ( man 1 rrdtool ) which gives you only basic information,
you should have a look at the RRDtool home page (http://oss.oetiker.ch/rrdtool/) . There is a
detailed documentation (http://oss.oetiker.ch/rrdtool/doc/index.en.html) of the rrdtool com-
mand and all its sub-commands. There are also several tutorials (http://oss.oetiker.ch/rrdtool/tut/
index.en.html) to help you understand the common RRDtool workflow.
If you are interested in monitoring network traffic, have a look at MRTG (Multi Router Traffic
Grapher) (http://oss.oetiker.ch/mrtg/) . MRTG can graph the activity of many network devices.
It can use RRDtool.

54 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

3 Analyzing and Managing System Log Files
System log le analysis is one of the most important tasks when analyzing the system. In fact,
looking at the system log les should be the rst thing to do when maintaining or troubleshoot-
ing a system. SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop automatically logs almost everything that hap-
pens on the system in detail. Since the move to systemd , kernel messages and messages of
system services registered with systemd are logged in systemd journal (see Book “Administra-
tion Guide”, Chapter 16 “journalctl: Query the systemd Journal”). Other log les (mainly those of
system applications) are written in plain text and can be easily read using an editor or pager. It
is also possible to parse them using scripts. This allows you to filter their content.

3.1 System Log Files in /var/log/

System log les are always located under the /var/log directory. The following list presents
an overview of all system log les from SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop present after a default
installation. Depending on your installation scope, /var/log also contains log les from other
services and applications not listed here. Some les and directories described below are “place-
holders” and are only used, when the corresponding application is installed. Most log les are
only visible for the user root .

apparmor/
AppArmor log les. See Book “Security Guide” for details of AppArmor.

audit/
Logs from the audit framework. See Book “Security Guide” for details.

ConsoleKit/
Logs of the ConsoleKit daemon (daemon for tracking what users are logged in and how
they interact with the computer).

cups/
Access and error logs of the Common Unix Printing System ( cups ).

firewall
Firewall logs.

gdm/
Log les from the GNOME display manager.

55 System Log Files in /var/log/ SLED 12 SP3

krb5/
Log les from the Kerberos network authentication system.

lastlog
A database containing information on the last login of each user. Use the command last-
log to view. See man 8 lastlog for more information.

localmessages
Log messages of some boot scripts, for example the log of the DHCP client.

mail*
Mail server ( postfix , sendmail ) logs.

messages
This is the default place where all kernel and system log messages go and should be the
rst place (along with /var/log/warn ) to look at in case of problems.

NetworkManager
NetworkManager log les.

news/
Log messages from a news server.

ntp
Logs from the Network Time Protocol daemon ( ntpd ).

pk_backend_zypp*
PackageKit (with libzypp back-end) log les.

puppet/
Log les from the data center automation tool puppet.

samba/
Log les from Samba, the Windows SMB/CIFS le server.

warn
Log of all system warnings and errors. This should be the rst place (along with the output
of the systemd journal) to look in case of problems.

wtmp
Database of all login/logout activities, and remote connections. Use the command last
to view. See man 1 last for more information.

56 System Log Files in /var/log/ SLED 12 SP3

xinetd.log
Log les from the extended Internet services daemon ( xinetd ).

Xorg.0.log
X.Org start-up log le. Refer to this in case you have problems starting X.Org. Copies from
previous X.Org starts are numbered Xorg. ? .log.

YaST2/
All YaST log les.

zypp/
libzypp log les. Refer to these les for the package installation history.

zypper.log
Logs from the command line installer zypper .

3.2 Viewing and Parsing Log Files

To view log les, you can use any text editor. There is also a simple YaST module for viewing
the system log available in the YaST control center under Miscellaneous System Log.
For viewing log les in a text console, use the commands less or more . Use head and tail
to view the beginning or end of a log le. To view entries appended to a log le in real-time use
tail -f . For information about how to use these tools, see their man pages.

To search for strings or regular expressions in log les use grep . awk is useful for parsing and
rewriting log les.

3.3 Managing Log Files with logrotate

Log les under /var/log grow on a daily basis and quickly become very large. logrotate is
a tool that helps you manage log les and their growth. It allows automatic rotation, removal,
compression, and mailing of log les. Log les can be handled periodically (daily, weekly, or
monthly) or when exceeding a particular size.
logrotate is usually run daily by systemd , and thus usually modifies log les only once a
day. However, exceptions occur when a log le is modified because of its size, if logrotate is
run multiple times a day, or if --force is enabled. Use /var/lib/misc/logrotate.status
to nd out when a particular le was last rotated.

57 Viewing and Parsing Log Files SLED 12 SP3

The main configuration le of logrotate is /etc/logrotate.conf . System packages and
programs that produce log les (for example, apache2 ) put their own configuration les in
the /etc/logrotate.d/ directory. The content of /etc/logrotate.d/ is included via /etc/
logrotate.conf .

EXAMPLE 3.1: EXAMPLE FOR /etc/logrotate.conf

# see "man logrotate" for details

# rotate log files weekly
weekly

# keep 4 weeks worth of backlogs

rotate 4

# create new (empty) log files after rotating old ones

create

# use date as a suffix of the rotated file

dateext

# uncomment this if you want your log files compressed

#compress

# comment these to switch compression to use gzip or another

# compression scheme
compresscmd /usr/bin/bzip2
uncompresscmd /usr/bin/bunzip2

# RPM packages drop log rotation information into this directory

include /etc/logrotate.d

Important: Avoid Permission Conflicts

The create option pays heed to the modes and ownerships of les specified in /etc/
permissions* . If you modify these settings, make sure no conflicts arise.

3.4 Monitoring Log Files with logwatch

logwatch is a customizable, pluggable log-monitoring script. It parses system logs, extracts
the important information and presents them in a human readable manner. To use logwatch ,
install the logwatch package.

58 Monitoring Log Files with logwatch SLED 12 SP3

logwatch can either be used at the command line to generate on-the-y reports, or via cron to
regularly create custom reports. Reports can either be printed on the screen, saved to a le, or
be mailed to a specified address. The latter is especially useful when automatically generating
reports via cron .
On the command line, you can tell logwatch for which service and time span to generate a
report and how much detail should be included:

# Detailed report on all kernel messages from yesterday

logwatch --service kernel --detail High --range Yesterday --print

# Low detail report on all sshd events recorded (incl. archived logs)
logwatch --service sshd --detail Low --range All --archives --print

# Mail a report on all smartd messages from May 5th to May 7th to root@localhost
logwatch --service smartd --range 'between 5/5/2005 and 5/7/2005' \
--mailto root@localhost --print

The --range option has got a complex syntax—see logwatch --range help for details. A
list of all services that can be queried is available with the following command:

ls /usr/share/logwatch/default.conf/services/ | sed 's/\.conf//g'

logwatch can be customized to great detail. However, the default configuration should usual-
ly be sufficient. The default configuration les are located under /usr/share/logwatch/de-
fault.conf/ . Never change them because they would get overwritten again with the next
update. Rather place custom configuration in /etc/logwatch/conf/ (you may use the de-
fault configuration le as a template, though). A detailed HOWTO on customizing logwatch is
available at /usr/share/doc/packages/logwatch/HOWTO-Customize-LogWatch . The follow-
ing configuration les exist:

logwatch.conf
The main configuration le. The default version is extensively commented. Each configu-
ration option can be overwritten on the command line.

ignore.conf
Filter for all lines that should globally be ignored by logwatch .

services/*.conf
The service directory holds configuration les for each service you can generate a report
for.

logfiles/*.conf
Specifications on which log les should be parsed for each service.

59 Monitoring Log Files with logwatch SLED 12 SP3

3.5 Using logger to Make System Log Entries
logger is a tool for making entries in the system log. It provides a shell command interface to
the rsyslogd system log module. For example, the following line outputs its message in /var/
log/messages or directly in the journal (if no logging facility is running):

logger -t Test "This message comes from $USER"

Depending on the current user and host name, the log contains a line similar to this:

Sep 28 13:09:31 venus Test: This message comes from tux

60 Using logger to Make System Log Entries SLED 12 SP3

III Kernel Monitoring

4 SystemTap—Filtering and Analyzing System Data 62

5 Kernel Probes 76

6 Hardware-Based Performance Monitoring with Perf 81

7 OProfile—System-Wide Profiler 86
4 SystemTap—Filtering and Analyzing System Data

SystemTap provides a command line interface and a scripting language to examine the activities
of a running Linux system, particularly the kernel, in ne detail. SystemTap scripts are written
in the SystemTap scripting language, are then compiled to C-code kernel modules and inserted
into the kernel. The scripts can be designed to extract, filter and summarize data, thus allowing
the diagnosis of complex performance problems or functional problems. SystemTap provides
information similar to the output of tools like netstat , ps , top , and iostat . However, more
filtering and analysis options can be used for the collected information.

4.1 Conceptual Overview

Each time you run a SystemTap script, a SystemTap session is started. Several passes are done
on the script before it is allowed to run. Then, the script is compiled into a kernel module and
loaded. If the script has been executed before and no system components have changed (for
example, different compiler or kernel versions, library paths, or script contents), SystemTap does
not compile the script again. Instead, it uses the *.c and *.ko data stored in the SystemTap
cache ( ~/.systemtap ).
The module is unloaded when the tap has finished running. For an example, see the test run in
Section 4.2, “Installation and Setup” and the respective explanation.

4.1.1 SystemTap Scripts

SystemTap usage is based on SystemTap scripts ( *.stp ). They tell SystemTap which type of
information to collect, and what to do once that information is collected. The scripts are written
in the SystemTap scripting language that is similar to AWK and C. For the language definition,
see http://sourceware.org/systemtap/langref/ . A lot of useful example scripts are available from
http://www.sourceware.org/systemtap/examples/ .
The essential idea behind a SystemTap script is to name events , and to give them handlers .
When SystemTap runs the script, it monitors for certain events. When an event occurs, the Linux
kernel runs the handler as a sub-routine, then resumes. Thus, events serve as the triggers for
handlers to run. Handlers can record specified data and print it in a certain manner.

62 Conceptual Overview SLED 12 SP3

The SystemTap language only uses a few data types (integers, strings, and associative arrays of
these), and full control structures (blocks, conditionals, loops, functions). It has a lightweight
punctuation (semicolons are optional) and does not need detailed declarations (types are in-
ferred and checked automatically).
For more information about SystemTap scripts and their syntax, refer to Section 4.3, “Script Syn-
tax” and to the stapprobes and stapfuncs man pages, that are available with the system-
tap-docs package.

4.1.2 Tapsets
Tapsets are a library of pre-written probes and functions that can be used in SystemTap scripts.
When a user runs a SystemTap script, SystemTap checks the script's probe events and handlers
against the tapset library. SystemTap then loads the corresponding probes and functions before
translating the script to C. Like SystemTap scripts themselves, tapsets use the le name extension
*.stp .

However, unlike SystemTap scripts, tapsets are not meant for direct execution. They constitute
the library from which other scripts can pull definitions. Thus, the tapset library is an abstraction
layer designed to make it easier for users to define events and functions. Tapsets provide aliases
for functions that users could want to specify as an event. Knowing the proper alias is often
easier than remembering specific kernel functions that might vary between kernel versions.

4.1.3 Commands and Privileges

The main commands associated with SystemTap are stap and staprun . To execute them, you
either need root privileges or must be a member of the stapdev or stapusr group.

stap
SystemTap front-end. Runs a SystemTap script (either from le, or from standard input). It
translates the script into C code, compiles it, and loads the resulting kernel module into a
running Linux kernel. Then, the requested system trace or probe functions are performed.

staprun
SystemTap back-end. Loads and unloads kernel modules produced by the SystemTap front-
end.

63 Tapsets SLED 12 SP3

For a list of options for each command, use --help . For details, refer to the stap and the
staprun man pages.

To avoid giving root access to users solely to enable them to work with SystemTap, use one
of the following SystemTap groups. They are not available by default on SUSE Linux Enterprise
Desktop, but you can create the groups and modify the access rights accordingly. Also adjust
the permissions of the staprun command if the security implications are appropriate for your
environment.

stapdev
Members of this group can run SystemTap scripts with stap , or run SystemTap instru-
mentation modules with staprun . As running stap involves compiling scripts into ker-
nel modules and loading them into the kernel, members of this group still have effective
root access.

stapusr
Members of this group are only allowed to run SystemTap instrumentation modules
with staprun . In addition, they can only run those modules from /lib/modules/KER-
NEL_VERSION/systemtap/ . This directory must be owned by root and must only be
writable for the root user.

4.1.4 Important Files and Directories

The following list gives an overview of the SystemTap main les and directories.

/lib/modules/KERNEL_VERSION/systemtap/
Holds the SystemTap instrumentation modules.

/usr/share/systemtap/tapset/
Holds the standard library of tapsets.

/usr/share/doc/packages/systemtap/examples
Holds several example SystemTap scripts for various purposes. Only available if the sys-
temtap-docs package is installed.

~/.systemtap/cache
Data directory for cached SystemTap les.

/tmp/stap*
Temporary directory for SystemTap les, including translated C code and kernel object.

64 Important Files and Directories SLED 12 SP3

4.2 Installation and Setup
As SystemTap needs information about the kernel, some additional kernel-related packages must
be installed. For each kernel you want to probe with SystemTap, you need to install a set of
the following packages. This set should exactly match the kernel version and flavor (indicated
by * in the overview below).

Important: Repository for Packages with Debugging Information

If you subscribed your system for online updates, you can nd “debuginfo” packages in the
*-Debuginfo-Updates online installation repository relevant for SUSE Linux Enterprise
Desktop 12 SP3. Use YaST to enable the repository.

For the classic SystemTap setup, install the following packages (using either YaST or zypper ).

systemtap

systemtap-server

systemtap-docs (optional)

kernel-*-base

kernel-*-debuginfo

kernel-*-devel

kernel-source-*

gcc

To get access to the man pages and to a helpful collection of example SystemTap scripts for
various purposes, additionally install the systemtap-docs package.
To check if all packages are correctly installed on the machine and if SystemTap is ready to use,
execute the following command as root .

stap -v -e 'probe vfs.read {printf("read performed\n"); exit()}'

It probes the currently used kernel by running a script and returning an output. If the output is
similar to the following, SystemTap is successfully deployed and ready to use:

Pass 1 : parsed user script and 59 library script(s) in 80usr/0sys/214real ms.

Pass 2 : analyzed script: 1 probe(s), 11 function(s), 2 embed(s), 1 global(s) in
140usr/20sys/412real ms.

65 Installation and Setup SLED 12 SP3

Pass 3 : translated to C into
"/tmp/stapDwEk76/stap_1856e21ea1c246da85ad8c66b4338349_4970.c" in 160usr/0sys/408real ms.
Pass 4 : compiled C into "stap_1856e21ea1c246da85ad8c66b4338349_4970.ko" in
2030usr/360sys/10182real ms.
Pass 5 : starting run.
read performed
Pass 5 : run completed in 10usr/20sys/257real ms.

1 Checks the script against the existing tapset library in /usr/share/systemtap/tapset/

for any tapsets used. Tapsets are scripts that form a library of pre-written probes and func-
tions that can be used in SystemTap scripts.
2 Examines the script for its components.
3 Translates the script to C. Runs the system C compiler to create a kernel module from it.
Both the resulting C code ( *.c ) and the kernel module ( *.ko ) are stored in the SystemTap
cache, ~/.systemtap .
4 Loads the module and enables all the probes (events and handlers) in the script by hooking
into the kernel. The event being probed is a Virtual File System (VFS) read. As the event
occurs on any processor, a valid handler is executed (prints the text read performed )
and closed with no errors.
5 After the SystemTap session is terminated, the probes are disabled, and the kernel module
is unloaded.
In case any error messages appear during the test, check the output for hints about any missing
packages and make sure they are installed correctly. Rebooting and loading the appropriate
kernel may also be needed.

4.3 Script Syntax

SystemTap scripts consist of the following two components:

SystemTap Events (Probe Points)

Name the kernel events at the associated handler should be executed. Examples for events
are entering or exiting a certain function, a timer expiring, or starting or terminating a
session.

SystemTap Handlers (Probe Body)

Series of script language statements that specify the work to be done whenever a certain
event occurs. This normally includes extracting data from the event context, storing them
into internal variables, or printing results.

66 Script Syntax SLED 12 SP3

An event and its corresponding handler is collectively called a probe . SystemTap events are
also called probe points . A probe's handler is also called a probe body .
Comments can be inserted anywhere in the SystemTap script in various styles: using either # ,
/* */ , or // as marker.

4.3.1 Probe Format

A SystemTap script can have multiple probes. They must be written in the following format:

probe EVENT {STATEMENTS}

Each probe has a corresponding statement block. This statement block must be enclosed in { }
and contains the statements to be executed per event.

EXAMPLE 4.1: SIMPLE SYSTEMTAP SCRIPT

The following example shows a simple SystemTap script.

probe 1 begin 2

{ 3

printf 4 ("hello world\n") 5

exit () 6

} 7

1 Start of the probe.

2 Event begin (the start of the SystemTap session).
3 Start of the handler definition, indicated by { .
4 First function defined in the handler: the printf function.
5 String to be printed by the printf function, followed by a line break ( /n ).
6 Second function defined in the handler: the exit() function. Note that the System-
Tap script will continue to run until the exit() function executes. If you want to
stop the execution of the script before, stop it manually by pressing Ctrl –C .
7 End of the handler definition, indicated by } .
The event begin 2 (the start of the SystemTap session) triggers the handler enclosed in
{ } . Here, that is the printf function 4 . In this case, it prints hello world followed
by a new line 5 . Then, the script exits.

67 Probe Format SLED 12 SP3

If your statement block holds several statements, SystemTap executes these statements in se-
quence—you do not need to insert special separators or terminators between multiple state-
ments. A statement block can also be nested within another statement blocks. Generally, state-
ment blocks in SystemTap scripts use the same syntax and semantics as in the C programming
language.

4.3.2 SystemTap Events (Probe Points)

SystemTap supports several built-in events.
The general event syntax is a dotted-symbol sequence. This allows a breakdown of the event
namespace into parts. Each component identifier may be parametrized by a string or number
literal, with a syntax like a function call. A component may include a * character, to expand to
other matching probe points. A probe point may be followed by a ? character, to indicate that
it is optional, and that no error should result if it fails to expand. Alternately, a probe point may
be followed by a ! character to indicate that it is both optional and sufficient.
SystemTap supports multiple events per probe—they need to be separated by a comma ( , ). If
multiple events are specified in a single probe, SystemTap will execute the handler when any
of the specified events occur.
In general, events can be classified into the following categories:

Synchronous events: Occur when any process executes an instruction at a particular loca-
tion in kernel code. This gives other events a reference point (instruction address) from
which more contextual data may be available.
An example for a synchronous event is vfs.FILE_OPERATION : The entry to the FILE_OP-
ERATION event for Virtual File System (VFS). For example, in Section 4.2, “Installation and
Setup”, read is the FILE_OPERATION event used for VFS.

Asynchronous events: Not tied to a particular instruction or location in code. This family
of probe points consists mainly of counters, timers, and similar constructs.
Examples for asynchronous events are: begin (start of a SystemTap session—when a Sys-
temTap script is run, end (end of a SystemTap session), or timer events. Timer events spec-
ify a handler to be executed periodically, like example timer.s(SECONDS) , or timer.m-
s(MILLISECONDS) .
When used together with other probes that collect information, timer events allow you to
print periodic updates and see how that information changes over time.

68 SystemTap Events (Probe Points) SLED 12 SP3

EXAMPLE 4.2: PROBE WITH TIMER EVENT

For example, the following probe would print the text “hello world” every 4 seconds:

probe timer.s(4)
{
printf("hello world\n")
}

For detailed information about supported events, refer to the stapprobes man page. The See
Also section of the man page also contains links to other man pages that discuss supported events
for specific subsystems and components.

4.3.3 SystemTap Handlers (Probe Body)

Each SystemTap event is accompanied by a corresponding handler defined for that event, con-
sisting of a statement block.

4.3.3.1 Functions

If you need the same set of statements in multiple probes, you can place them in a function for
easy reuse. Functions are defined by the keyword function followed by a name. They take any
number of string or numeric arguments (by value) and may return a single string or number.

function FUNCTION_NAME(ARGUMENTS) {STATEMENTS}

probe EVENT {FUNCTION_NAME(ARGUMENTS)}

The statements in FUNCTION_NAME are executed when the probe for EVENT executes. The AR-
GUMENTS are optional values passed into the function.

Functions can be defined anywhere in the script. They may take any
One of the functions needed very often was already introduced in Example 4.1, “Simple SystemTap
Script”: the printf function for printing data in a formatted way. When using the printf
function, you can specify how arguments should be printed by using a format string. The format
string is included in quotation marks and can contain further format specifiers, introduced by
a % character.
Which format strings to use depends on your list of arguments. Format strings can have mul-
tiple format specifiers—each matching a corresponding argument. Multiple arguments can be
separated by a comma.

69 SystemTap Handlers (Probe Body) SLED 12 SP3

EXAMPLE 4.3: printf FUNCTION WITH FORMAT SPECIFIERS

printf (" 1 %s 2 (%d 3 ) open\n 4 ", execname(), pid())

1 Start of the format string, indicated by " .

2 String format specifier.
3 Integer format specifier.
4 End of the format string, indicated by " .

The example above prints the current executable name ( execname() ) as a string and the process
ID ( pid() ) as an integer in brackets. Then, a space, the word open and a line break follow:

[...]
vmware-guestd(2206) open
hald(2360) open
[...]

Apart from the two functions execname() and pid() ) used in Example 4.3, “printf Function with
Format Specifiers”, a variety of other functions can be used as printf arguments.

Among the most commonly used SystemTap functions are the following:

tid()
ID of the current thread.

pid()
Process ID of the current thread.

uid()
ID of the current user.

cpu()
Current CPU number.

execname()
Name of the current process.

gettimeofday_s()
Number of seconds since Unix epoch (January 1, 1970).

ctime()
Convert time into a string.

70 SystemTap Handlers (Probe Body) SLED 12 SP3

pp()
String describing the probe point currently being handled.

thread_indent()
Useful function for organizing print results. It (internally) stores an indentation counter for
each thread ( tid() ). The function takes one argument, an indentation delta, indicating
how many spaces to add or remove from the thread's indentation counter. It returns a string
with some generic trace data along with an appropriate number of indentation spaces.
The generic data returned includes a time stamp (number of microseconds since the initial
indentation for the thread), a process name, and the thread ID itself. This allows you to
identify what functions were called, who called them, and how long they took.
Call entries and exits often do not immediately precede each other (otherwise it would
be easy to match them). In between a rst call entry and its exit, usually other call en-
tries and exits are made. The indentation counter helps you match an entry with its corre-
sponding exit as it indents the next function call in case it is not the exit of the previous
one. For an example SystemTap script using thread_indent() and the respective out-
put, refer to the SystemTap Tutorial: http://sourceware.org/systemtap/tutorial/Tracing.htm-
l#fig:socket-trace .

For more information about supported SystemTap functions, refer to the stapfuncs man page.

4.3.3.2 Other Basic Constructs

Apart from functions, you can use other common constructs in SystemTap handlers, including
variables, conditional statements (like if / else , while loops, for loops, arrays or command
line arguments.

4.3.3.2.1 Variables

Variables may be defined anywhere in the script. To define one, simply choose a name and
assign a value from a function or expression to it:

foo = gettimeofday( )

Then you can use the variable in an expression. From the type of values assigned to the variable,
SystemTap automatically infers the type of each identifier (string or number). Any inconsisten-
cies will be reported as errors. In the example above, foo would automatically be classified as
a number and could be printed via printf() with the integer format specifier ( %d ).

71 SystemTap Handlers (Probe Body) SLED 12 SP3

However, by default, variables are local to the probe they are used in: They are initialized, used
and disposed of at each handler evocation. To share variables between probes, declare them
global anywhere in the script. To do so, use the global keyword outside of the probes:

EXAMPLE 4.4: USING GLOBAL VARIABLES

global count_jiffies, count_ms

probe timer.jiffies(100) { count_jiffies ++ }
probe timer.ms(100) { count_ms ++ }
probe timer.ms(12345)
{
hz=(1000*count_jiffies) / count_ms
printf ("jiffies:ms ratio %d:%d => CONFIG_HZ=%d\n",
count_jiffies, count_ms, hz)
exit ()
}

This example script computes the CONFIG_HZ setting of the kernel by using timers that
count jies and milliseconds, then computing accordingly. (A jiy is the duration of one
tick of the system timer interrupt. It is not an absolute time interval unit, since its duration
depends on the clock interrupt frequency of the particular hardware platform). With the
global statement it is possible to use the variables count_jiffies and count_ms also
in the probe timer.ms(12345) . With ++ the value of a variable is incremented by 1 .

4.3.3.2.2 Conditional Statements

There are several conditional statements that you can use in SystemTap scripts. The following
are probably the most common:

If/Else Statements
They are expressed in the following format:

if (CONDITION) 1 STATEMENT1 2

else 3 STATEMENT2 4

The if statement compares an integer-valued expression to zero. If the condition expres-

sion 1 is non-zero, the rst statement 2 is executed. If the condition expression is zero,
the second statement 4 is executed. The else clause ( 3 and 4 ) is optional. Both 2 and
4 can also be statement blocks.

72 SystemTap Handlers (Probe Body) SLED 12 SP3

While Loops
They are expressed in the following format:

while (CONDITION) 1 STATEMENT 2

As long as condition is non-zero, the statement 2 is executed. 2 can also be a statement

block. It must change a value so condition will eventually be zero.

For Loops
They are a shortcut for while loops and are expressed in the following format:

for (INITIALIZATION 1 ; CONDITIONAL 2 ; INCREMENT 3 ) statement

The expression specified in 1 is used to initialize a counter for the number of loop iter-
ations and is executed before execution of the loop starts. The execution of the loop con-
tinues until the loop condition 2 is false. (This expression is checked at the beginning of
each loop iteration). The expression specified in 3 is used to increment the loop counter.
It is executed at the end of each loop iteration.

Conditional Operators
The following operators can be used in conditional statements:

==:  Is equal to

!=:  Is not equal to

>=:  Is greater than or equal to

<=:  Is less than or equal to

4.4 Example Script

If you have installed the systemtap-docs package, you can nd several useful SystemTap
example scripts in /usr/share/doc/packages/systemtap/examples .
This section describes a rather simple example script in more detail: /usr/share/doc/pack-
ages/systemtap/examples/network/tcp_connections.stp .

EXAMPLE 4.5: MONITORING INCOMING TCP CONNECTIONS WITH tcp_connections.stp

#! /usr/bin/env stap

73 Example Script SLED 12 SP3

probe begin {
printf("%6s %16s %6s %6s %16s\n",
"UID", "CMD", "PID", "PORT", "IP_SOURCE")
}

probe kernel.function("tcp_accept").return?,
kernel.function("inet_csk_accept").return? {
sock = $return
if (sock != 0)
printf("%6d %16s %6d %6d %16s\n", uid(), execname(), pid(),
inet_get_local_port(sock), inet_get_ip_source(sock))
}

This SystemTap script monitors the incoming TCP connections and helps to identify unautho-
rized or unwanted network access requests in real time. It shows the following information for
each new incoming TCP connection accepted by the computer:

User ID ( UID )

Command accepting the connection ( CMD )

Process ID of the command ( PID )

Port used by the connection ( PORT )

IP address from which the TCP connection originated ( IP_SOUCE )

To run the script, execute

stap /usr/share/doc/packages/systemtap/examples/network/tcp_connections.stp

and follow the output on the screen. To manually stop the script, press Ctrl –C .

4.5 User Space Probing

For debugging user space applications (like DTrace can do), SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12
SP3 supports user space probing with SystemTap: Custom probe points can be inserted in any
user space application. Thus, SystemTap lets you use both kernel space and user space probes
to debug the behavior of the whole system.
To get the required utrace infrastructure and the uprobes kernel module for user space probing,
you need to install the kernel-trace package in addition to the packages listed in Section 4.2,
“Installation and Setup”.

74 User Space Probing SLED 12 SP3

utrace implements a framework for controlling user space tasks. It provides an interface that
can be used by various tracing “engines”, implemented as loadable kernel modules. The engines
register callback functions for specific events, then attach to whichever thread they want to
trace. As the callbacks are made from “safe” places in the kernel, this allows for great leeway
in the kinds of processing the functions can do. Various events can be watched via utrace, for
example, system call entry and exit, fork(), signals being sent to the task, etc. More details about
the utrace infrastructure are available at http://sourceware.org/systemtap/wiki/utrace .
SystemTap includes support for probing the entry into and return from a function in user space
processes, probing predefined markers in user space code, and monitoring user-process events.
To check if the currently running kernel provides the needed utrace support, use the following
command:

grep CONFIG_UTRACE /boot/config-`uname -r`

For more details about user space probing, refer to https://sourceware.org/systemtap/System-

Tap_Beginners_Guide/userspace-probing.html .

4.6 For More Information

This chapter only provides a short SystemTap overview. Refer to the following links for more
information about SystemTap:

http://sourceware.org/systemtap/
SystemTap project home page.

http://sourceware.org/systemtap/wiki/
Huge collection of useful information about SystemTap, ranging from detailed user and de-
veloper documentation to reviews and comparisons with other tools, or Frequently Asked
Questions and tips. Also contains collections of SystemTap scripts, examples and usage
stories and lists recent talks and papers about SystemTap.

http://sourceware.org/systemtap/documentation.html
Features a SystemTap Tutorial, a SystemTap Beginner's Guide, a Tapset Developer's Guide, and
a SystemTap Language Reference in PDF and HTML format. Also lists the relevant man pages.

You can also nd the SystemTap language reference and SystemTap tutorial in your installed
system under /usr/share/doc/packages/systemtap . Example SystemTap scripts are avail-
able from the example subdirectory.

75 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

5 Kernel Probes
Kernel probes are a set of tools to collect Linux kernel debugging and performance information.
Developers and system administrators usually use them either to debug the kernel, or to nd
system performance bottlenecks. The reported data can then be used to tune the system for
better performance.
You can insert these probes into any kernel routine, and specify a handler to be invoked after a
particular break-point is hit. The main advantage of kernel probes is that you no longer need to
rebuild the kernel and reboot the system after you make changes in a probe.
To use kernel probes, you typically need to write or obtain a specific kernel module. Such mod-
ules include both the init and the exit function. The init function (such as register_kprobe() )
registers one or more probes, while the exit function unregisters them. The registration func-
tion defines where the probe will be inserted and which handler will be called after the probe
is hit. To register or unregister a group of probes at one time, you can use relevant regis-
ter_<PROBE_TYPE>probes() or unregister_<PROBE_TYPE>probes() functions.

Debugging and status messages are typically reported with the printk kernel routine. printk
is a kernel space equivalent of a user space printf routine. For more information on printk ,
see Logging kernel messages (http://www.win.tue.nl/~aeb/linux/lk/lk-2.html#ss2.8) . Normally,
you can view these messages by inspecting the output of the systemd journal (see Book “Ad-
ministration Guide”, Chapter 16 “journalctl: Query the systemd Journal”). For more information
on log les, see Chapter 3, Analyzing and Managing System Log Files.

5.1 Supported Architectures

Kernel probes are fully implemented on the following architectures:

x86

AMD64/Intel 64

ARM

POWER

Kernel probes are partially implemented on the following architectures:

IA64 (does not support probes on instruction slot1 )

sparc64 (return probes not yet implemented)

76 Supported Architectures SLED 12 SP3

5.2 Types of Kernel Probes
There are three types of kernel probes: Kprobes, Jprobes, and Kretprobes. Kretprobes are some-
times called return probes. You can nd source code examples of all three type of probes
in the Linux kernel. See the directory /usr/src/linux/samples/kprobes/ (package ker-
nel-source ).

5.2.1 Kprobes
Kprobes can be attached to any instruction in the Linux kernel. When Kprobes is registered, it
inserts a break-point at the rst byte of the probed instruction. When the processor hits this
break-point, the processor registers are saved, and the processing passes to Kprobes. First, a pre-
handler is executed, then the probed instruction is stepped, and, finally a post-handler is executed.
The control is then passed to the instruction following the probe point.

5.2.2 Jprobes
Jprobes is implemented through the Kprobes mechanism. It is inserted on a function's entry
point and allows direct access to the arguments of the function which is being probed. Its handler
routine must have the same argument list and return value as the probed function. To end it,
call the jprobe_return() function.
When a jprobe is hit, the processor registers are saved, and the instruction pointer is directed
to the jprobe handler routine. The control then passes to the handler with the same register
contents as the function being probed. Finally, the handler calls the jprobe_return() function,
and switches the control back to the control function.
In general, you can insert multiple probes on one function. Jprobe is, however, limited to only
one instance per function.

5.2.3 Return Probe

Return probes are also implemented through Kprobes. When the register_kretprobe() func-
tion is called, a kprobe is attached to the entry of the probed function. After hitting the probe,
the kernel probes mechanism saves the probed function return address and calls a user-defined
return handler. The control is then passed back to the probed function.

77 Types of Kernel Probes SLED 12 SP3

Before you call register_kretprobe() , you need to set a maxactive argument, which spec-
ifies how many instances of the function can be probed at the same time. If set too low, you
will miss a certain number of probes.

5.3 Kprobes API

The programming interface of Kprobes consists of functions which are used to register and
unregister all used kernel probes, and associated probe handlers. For a more detailed description
of these functions and their arguments, see the information sources in Section  5.5, “For More
Information”.

register_kprobe()
Inserts a break-point on a specified address. When the break-point is hit, the pre_handler
and post_handler are called.

register_jprobe()
Inserts a break-point in the specified address. The address needs to be the address of the
rst instruction of the probed function. When the break-point is hit, the specified handler
is run. The handler should have the same argument list and return type as the probed.

register_kretprobe()
Inserts a return probe for the specified function. When the probed function returns, a
specified handler is run. This function returns 0 on success, or a negative error number
on failure.

unregister_kprobe() , unregister_jprobe() , unregister_kretprobe()

Removes the specified probe. You can use it any time after the probe has been registered.

register_kprobes() , register_jprobes() , register_kretprobes()

Inserts each of the probes in the specified array.

unregister_kprobes() , unregister_jprobes() , unregister_kretprobes()

Removes each of the probes in the specified array.

disable_kprobe() , disable_jprobe() , disable_kretprobe()

Disables the specified probe temporarily.

enable_kprobe() , enable_jprobe() , enable_kretprobe()

Temporarily enables disabled probes.

78 Kprobes API SLED 12 SP3

5.4 debugfs Interface
In recent Linux kernels, the Kprobes instrumentation uses the kernel's debugfs interface. It can
list all registered probes and globally switch all probes on or o.

5.4.1 Listing Registered Kernel Probes

The list of all currently registered probes is in the /sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/list le.

saturn.example.com:~ # cat /sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/list

c015d71a k vfs_read+0x0 [DISABLED]
c011a316 j do_fork+0x0
c03dedc5 r tcp_v4_rcv+0x0

The rst column lists the address in the kernel where the probe is inserted. The second column
prints the type of the probe: k for kprobe, j for jprobe, and r for return probe. The third column
specifies the symbol, offset and optional module name of the probe. The following optional
columns include the status information of the probe. If the probe is inserted on a virtual address
which is not valid anymore, it is marked with [GONE] . If the probe is temporarily disabled, it
is marked with [DISABLED] .

5.4.2 How to Switch All Kernel Probes On or Off

The /sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/enabled le represents a switch with which you can glob-
ally and forcibly turn on or o all the registered kernel probes. To turn them o, simply enter

echo "0" > /sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/enabled

on the command line as root . To turn them on again, enter

echo "1" > /sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/enabled

Note that this way you do not change the status of the probes. If a probe is temporarily disabled,
it will not be enabled automatically but will remain in the [DISABLED] state after entering the
latter command.

79 debugfs Interface SLED 12 SP3

5.5 For More Information
To learn more about kernel probes, look at the following sources of information:

Thorough but more technically oriented information about kernel probes is in /usr/src/
linux/Documentation/kprobes.txt (package kenrel-source ).

Examples of all three types of probes (together with related Makefile ) are in the /usr/
src/linux/samples/kprobes/ directory (package kenrel-source ).

In-depth information about Linux kernel modules and printk kernel routine is in The
Linux Kernel Module Programming Guide (http://tldp.org/LDP/lkmpg/2.6/html/lkmpg.html)

Practical but slightly outdated information about the use of kernel probes can be
found in Kernel debugging with Kprobes (http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/library/l-
kprobes.html)

80 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

6 Hardware-Based Performance Monitoring with Perf

Perf is an interface to access the performance monitoring unit (PMU) of a proces-

sor and to record and display software events such as page faults. It supports sys-
tem-wide, per-thread, and KVM virtualization guest monitoring.
You can store resulting information in a report. This report contains information about, for
example, instruction pointers or what code a thread was executing.
Perf consists of two parts:

Code integrated into the Linux kernel that is responsible for instructing the hardware.

The perf user space utility that allows you to use the kernel code and helps you analyze
gathered data.

6.1 Hardware-Based Monitoring

Performance monitoring means collecting information related to how an application or system
performs. This information can be obtained either through software-based means or from the
CPU or chipset. Perf integrates both of these methods.
Many modern processors contain a performance monitoring unit (PMU). The design and func-
tionality of a PMU is CPU-specific. For example, the number of registers, counters and features
supported will vary by CPU implementation.
Each PMU model consists of a set of registers: the performance monitor configuration (PMC)
and the performance monitor data (PMD). Both can be read, but only PMCs are writable. These
registers store configuration information and data.

6.2 Sampling and Counting

Perf supports several profiling modes:

Counting.  Count the number of occurrences of an event.

Event-Based Sampling.  A less exact way of counting: A sample is recorded whenever a

certain threshold number of events has occurred.

81 Hardware-Based Monitoring SLED 12 SP3

 Time-Based Sampling.  A less exact way of counting: A sample is recorded in a defined
frequency.

Instruction-Based Sampling (AMD64 only).  The processor follows instructions appearing

in a given interval and samples which events they produce. This allows following up on
individual instructions and seeing which of them is critical to performance.

6.3 Installing Perf

The Perf kernel code is already included with the default kernel. To be able to use the user space
utility, install the package perf .

6.4 Perf Subcommands

To gather the required information, the perf tool has several subcommands. This section gives
an overview of the most often used commands.
To see help in the form of a man page for any of the subcommands, use either perf help SUB-
COMMAND or man perf- SUBCOMMAND .

perf stat
Start a program and create a statistical overview that is displayed after the program quits.
perf stat is used to count events.

perf record
Start a program and create a report with performance counter information. The report is
stored as perf.data in the current directory. perf record is used to sample events.

perf report
Display a report that was previously created with perf record .

perf annotate
Display a report le and an annotated version of the executed code. If debug symbols are
installed, you will also see the source code displayed.

perf list
List event types that Perf can report with the current kernel and with your CPU. You can
filter event types by category—for example, to see hardware events only, use perf list
hw .

82 Installing Perf SLED 12 SP3

 The man page for perf_event_open has short descriptions for the most important
events. For example, to nd a description of the event branch-misses , search for
BRANCH_MISSES (note the spelling differences):

tux > man perf_event_open | grep -A5 BRANCH_MISSES

Sometimes, events may be ambiguous. Note that the lowercase hardware event names are
not the name of raw hardware events but instead the name of aliases created by Perf. These
aliases map to differently named but similarly defined hardware events on each supported
processor.
For example, the cpu-cycles event is mapped to the hardware event UNHALT-
ED_CORE_CYCLES on Intel processors. On AMD processors, however, it is mapped to the
hardware event CPU_CLK_UNHALTED .
Perf also allows measuring raw events specific to your hardware. To look up their descrip-
tions, see the Architecture Software Developer's Manual of your CPU vendor. The relevant
documents for AMD64/Intel 64 processors are linked to in Section 6.7, “For More Information”.

perf top
Display system activity as it happens.

perf trace
This command behaves similarly to strace . With this subcommand, you can see which
system calls are executed by a particular thread or process and which signals it receives.

6.5 Counting Particular Types of Event

To count the number of occurrences of an event, such as those displayed by perf list , use:

root # perf stat -e EVENT -a

To count multiple types of events at once, list them separated by commas. For example, to count
cpu-cycles and instructions , use:

root # perf stat -e cpu-cycles,instructions -a

To stop the session, press Ctrl –C .

You can also count the number of occurrences of an event within a particular time:

root # perf stat -e EVENT -a -- sleep TIME

83 Counting Particular Types of Event SLED 12 SP3

Replace TIME by a value in seconds.

6.6 Recording Events Specific to Particular

Commands
There are various ways to sample events specific to a particular command:

To create a report for a newly invoked command, use:

root # perf record COMMAND

Then, use the started process normally. When you quit the process, the Perf session will
also stop.

To create a report for the entire system while a newly invoked command is running, use:

root # perf record -a COMMAND

Then, use the started process normally. When you quit the process, the Perf session will
also stop.

To create a report for an already running process, use:

root # perf record -p PID

Replace PID with a process ID. To stop the session, press Ctrl –C .

Now you can view the gathered data ( perf.data ) using:

tux > perf report

This will open a pseudo-graphical interface. To receive help, press H . To quit, press Q .
If you prefer a graphical interface, try the GTK+ interface of Perf:

tux > perf report --gtk

However, note that the GTK+ interface is very limited in functionality.

84 Recording Events Specific to Particular Commands SLED 12 SP3

6.7 For More Information
This chapter only provides a short overview. Refer to the following links for more information:

https://perf.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Main_Page
The project home page. It also features a tutorial on using perf .

http://www.brendangregg.com/perf.html
Unofficial page with many one-line examples of how to use perf .

http://web.eece.maine.edu/~vweaver/projects/perf_events/
Unofficial page with several resources, mostly relating to the Linux kernel code of Perf and
its API. This page includes, for example, a CPU compatibility table and a programming
guide.

https://www-ssl.intel.com/content/dam/www/public/us/en/documents/manuals/64-ia-32-
architectures-software-developer-vol-3b-part-2-manual.pdf
The Intel Architectures Software Developer's Manual, Volume 3B.

https://support.amd.com/TechDocs/24593.pdf
The AMD Architecture Programmer's Manual, Volume 2.

Chapter 7, OProfile—System-Wide Profiler

Consult this chapter for other performance optimizations.

85 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

7 OProfile—System-Wide Profiler

OProfile is a profiler for dynamic program analysis. It investigates the behavior of

a running program and gathers information. This information can be viewed and
gives hints for further optimization.
It is not necessary to recompile or use wrapper libraries to use OProfile. Not even a
kernel patch is needed. Usually, when profiling an application, a small overhead is
expected, depending on the workload and sampling frequency.

7.1 Conceptual Overview

OProfile consists of a kernel driver and a daemon for collecting data. It uses the hardware
performance counters provided on many processors. OProfile is capable of profiling all code
including the kernel, kernel modules, kernel interrupt handlers, system shared libraries, and
other applications.
Modern processors support profiling through the hardware by performance counters. Depending
on the processor, there can be many counters and each of these can be programmed with an
event to count. Each counter has a value which determines how often a sample is taken. The
lower the value, the more often it is used.
During the post-processing step, all information is collected and instruction addresses are
mapped to a function name.

7.2 Installation and Requirements

To use OProfile, install the oprofile package that is included with the SLE SDK. OProfile works
on AMD64/Intel 64, z Systems, and POWER processors. To nd out how to install software from
the SDK, refer to Book “Deployment Guide”, Chapter 10 “Installing Modules, Extensions, and Third Party
Add-On Products”, Section 10.3 “SUSE Software Development Kit (SDK) 12 SP3”.

It is useful to install the *-debuginfo package for the respective application you want to profile.
If you want to profile the kernel, you need the debuginfo package as well.

86 Conceptual Overview SLED 12 SP3

7.3 Available OProfile Utilities
OProfile contains several utilities to handle the profiling process and its profiled data. The fol-
lowing list is a short summary of programs used in this chapter:

opannotate
Outputs annotated source or assembly listings mixed with profile information. An anno-
tated report can be used in combination with addr2line to identify the source le and
line where hotspots potentially exist. See man addr2line for more information.

opcontrol
Controls the profiling sessions (start or stop), dumps profile data, and sets up parameters.

ophelp
Lists available events with short descriptions.

opimport
Converts sample database les from a foreign binary format to the native format.

opreport
Generates reports from profiled data.

7.4 Using OProfile

With OProfile, you can profile both the kernel and applications. When profiling the kernel, tell
OProfile where to nd the vmlinuz* le. Use the --vmlinux option and point it to vmlinuz*
(usually in /boot ). If you need to profile kernel modules, OProfile does this by default. However,
make sure you read http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/doc/kernel-profiling.html .
Applications usually do not need to profile the kernel, therefore you should use the --no-
vmlinux option to reduce the amount of information.

7.4.1 Creating a Report

Starting the daemon, collecting data, stopping the daemon, and creating a report.

1. Open a shell and log in as root .

87 Available OProfile Utilities SLED 12 SP3

 2. Decide if you want to profile with or without the Linux kernel:

a. Profile With the Linux Kernel.  Execute the following commands, because opcontrol
can only work with uncompressed images:

cp /boot/vmlinux-`uname -r`.gz /tmp

gunzip /tmp/vmlinux*.gz
opcontrol --vmlinux=/tmp/vmlinux*

b. Profile Without the Linux Kernel.  Use the following command:

opcontrol --no-vmlinux

To see which functions call other functions in the output, additionally use the --
callgraph option and set a maximum DEPTH :

opcontrol --no-vmlinux --callgraph DEPTH

3. Start the OProfile daemon:

opcontrol --start
Using 2.6+ OProfile kernel interface.
Using log file /var/lib/oprofile/samples/oprofiled.log
Daemon started.
Profiler running.

4. Now start the application you want to profile.

5. Stop the OProfile daemon:

opcontrol --stop

6. Dump the collected data to /var/lib/oprofile/samples :

opcontrol --dump

7. Create a report:

opreport
Overflow stats not available
CPU: CPU with timer interrupt, speed 0 MHz (estimated)
Profiling through timer interrupt
TIMER:0|
samples| %|

88 Creating a Report SLED 12 SP3

 ------------------
84877 98.3226 no-vmlinux
...

8. Shut down the oprofile daemon:

opcontrol --shutdown

7.4.2 Getting Event Configurations

The general procedure for event configuration is as follows:

1. Use rst the events CPU-CLK_UNHALTED and INST_RETIRED to nd optimization oppor-
tunities.

2. Use specific events to nd bottlenecks. To list them, use the command opcontrol --
list-events .

If you need to profile certain events, rst check the available events supported by your processor
with the ophelp command (example output generated from Intel Core i5 CPU):

ophelp
oprofile: available events for CPU type "Intel Architectural Perfmon"

See Intel 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer's Manual

Volume 3B (Document 253669) Chapter 18 for architectural perfmon events
This is a limited set of fallback events because oprofile does not know your CPU
CPU_CLK_UNHALTED: (counter: all))
Clock cycles when not halted (min count: 6000)
INST_RETIRED: (counter: all))
number of instructions retired (min count: 6000)
LLC_MISSES: (counter: all))
Last level cache demand requests from this core that missed the LLC (min count:
6000)
Unit masks (default 0x41)
----------
0x41: No unit mask
LLC_REFS: (counter: all))
Last level cache demand requests from this core (min count: 6000)
Unit masks (default 0x4f)
----------
0x4f: No unit mask
BR_MISS_PRED_RETIRED: (counter: all))

89 Getting Event Configurations SLED 12 SP3

 number of mispredicted branches retired (precise) (min count: 500)

You can get the same output from opcontrol --list-events .

Specify the performance counter events with the option --event . Multiple options are possible.
This option needs an event name (from ophelp ) and a sample rate, for example:

opcontrol --event=CPU_CLK_UNHALTED:100000

Warning: Setting Sampling Rates with CPU_CLK_UNHALTED

Setting low sampling rates can seriously impair the system performance while high sam-
ple rates can disrupt the system to such a high degree that the data is useless. It is recom-
mended to tune the performance metric for being monitored with and without OProfile
and to experimentally determine the minimum sample rate that disrupts the performance
the least.

7.5 Using OProfile's GUI

The GUI for OProfile can be started as root with oprof_start , see Figure 7.1, “GUI for OProfile”.
Select your events and change the counter, if necessary. Every green line is added to the list
of checked events. Hover the mouse over the line to see a help text in the status line below.
Use the Configuration tab to set the buer and CPU size, the verbose option and others. Click
Start to execute OProfile.

FIGURE 7.1: GUI FOR OPROFILE

90 Using OProfile's GUI SLED 12 SP3

7.6 Generating Reports
Before generating a report, make sure OProfile has dumped your data to the /var/lib/opro-
file/samples directory using the command opcontrol --dump . A report can be generated
with the commands opreport or opannotate .
Calling opreport without any options gives a complete summary. With an executable as an
argument, retrieve profile data only from this executable. If you analyze applications written in
C++, use the --demangle smart option.
The opannotate generates output with annotations from source code. Run it with the following
options:

opannotate --source \
--base-dirs=BASEDIR \
--search-dirs= \
--output-dir=annotated/ \
/lib/libfoo.so

The option --base-dir contains a comma separated list of paths which is stripped from debug
source les. These paths were searched prior to looking in --search-dirs . The --search-
dirs option is also a comma separated list of directories to search for source les.

Note: Inaccuracies in Annotated Source

Because of compiler optimization, code can disappear and appear in a different place.
Use the information in http://oprofile.sourceforge.net/doc/debug-info.html to fully un-
derstand its implications.

7.7 For More Information

This chapter only provides a short overview. Refer to the following links for more information:

http://oprofile.sourceforge.net
The project home page.

Manpages
Details descriptions about the options of the different tools.

/usr/share/doc/packages/oprofile/oprofile.html
Contains the OProfile manual.

91 Generating Reports SLED 12 SP3

http://developer.intel.com/
Architecture reference for Intel processors.

http://www-01.ibm.com/chips/techlib/techlib.nsf/productfamilies/PowerPC/
Architecture reference for PowerPC64 processors in IBM iSeries, pSeries, and Blade server
systems.

92 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

IV Resource Management

8 General System Resource Management 94

9 Kernel Control Groups 99

10 Automatic Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) Balancing 108

11 Power Management 113

8 General System Resource Management

Tuning the system is not only about optimizing the kernel or getting the most out of
your application, it begins with setting up a lean and fast system. The way you set
up your partitions and le systems can influence the server's speed. The number of
active services and the way routine tasks are scheduled also affects performance.

8.1 Planning the Installation

A carefully planned installation ensures that the system is set up exactly as you need it for
the given purpose. It also saves considerable time when ne tuning the system. All changes
suggested in this section can be made in the Installation Settings step during the installation.
See Book “Deployment Guide”, Chapter 3 “Installation with YaST”, Section 3.13 “Installation Settings” for
details.

8.1.1 Partitioning
Depending on the server's range of applications and the hardware layout, the partitioning
scheme can influence the machine's performance (although to a lesser extent only). It is beyond
the scope of this manual to suggest different partitioning schemes for particular workloads.
However, the following rules will positively affect performance. They do not apply when using
an external storage system.

Make sure there always is some free space available on the disk, since a full disk delivers
inferior performance

Disperse simultaneous read and write access onto different disks by, for example:

using separate disks for the operating system, data, and log les

placing a mail server's spool directory on a separate disk

distributing the user directories of a home server between different disks

94 Planning the Installation SLED 12 SP3

8.1.2 Installation Scope
The installation scope has no direct influence on the machine's performance, but a carefully
chosen scope of packages has advantages. It is recommended to install the minimum of packages
needed to run the server. A system with a minimum set of packages is easier to maintain and
has fewer potential security issues. Furthermore, a tailor made installation scope also ensures
that no unnecessary services are started by default.
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop lets you customize the installation scope on the Installation
Summary screen. By default, you can select or remove preconfigured patterns for specific tasks,
but it is also possible to start the YaST Software Manager for a ne-grained package-based
selection.
One or more of the following default patterns may not be needed in all cases:

GNOME Desktop Environment

Servers rarely need a full desktop environment. In case a graphical environment is needed,
a more economical solution such as IceWM can be sufficient.

X Window System
When solely administrating the server and its applications via command line, consider not
installing this pattern. However, keep in mind that it is needed to run GUI applications
from a remote machine. If your application is managed by a GUI or if you prefer the GUI
version of YaST, keep this pattern.

Print Server
This pattern is only needed if you want to print from the machine.

8.1.3 Default Target

A running X Window System consumes many resources and is rarely needed on a server. It is
strongly recommended to start the system in target multi-user.target . You will still be able
to remotely start graphical applications.

8.2 Disabling Unnecessary Services

The default installation starts several services (the number varies with the installation scope).
Since each service consumes resources, it is recommended to disable the ones not needed. Run
YaST System Services Manager to start the services management module.

95 Installation Scope SLED 12 SP3

If you are using the graphical version of YaST, you can click the column headlines to sort the
list of services. Use this to get an overview of which services are currently running. Use the
Start/Stop button to disable the service for the running session. To permanently disable it, use
the Enable/Disable button.
The following list shows services that are started by default after the installation of SUSE Linux
Enterprise Desktop. Check which of the components you need, and disable the others:

alsasound
Loads the Advanced Linux Sound System.

auditd
A daemon for the Audit system (see Book “Security Guide” for details). Disable this if you
do not use Audit.

bluez-coldplug
Handles cold plugging of Bluetooth dongles.

cups
A printer daemon.

java.binfmt_misc
Enables the execution of *.class or *.jar Java programs.

nfs
Services needed to mount NFS.

smbfs
Services needed to mount SMB/CIFS le systems from a Windows* server.

splash / splash_early
Shows the splash screen on start-up.

8.3 File Systems and Disk Access

Hard disks are the slowest components in a computer system and therefore often the cause for
a bottleneck. Using the le system that best suits your workload helps to improve performance.
Using special mount options or prioritizing a process's I/O priority are further means to speed
up the system.

96 File Systems and Disk Access SLED 12 SP3

8.3.1 File Systems
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop ships with several le systems, including BtrFS, Ext4, Ext3, Ext2,
ReiserFS, and XFS. Each le system has its own advantages and disadvantages.

8.3.1.1 NFS

NFS (Version 3) tuning is covered in detail in the NFS Howto at http://nfs.sourceforge.net/nfs-

howto/ . The rst thing to experiment with when mounting NFS shares is increasing the read
write blocksize to 32768 by using the mount options wsize and rsize .

8.3.2 Time Stamp Update Policy

Each le and directory in a le system has three time stamps associated with it: a time when the
le was last read called access time, a time when the le data was last modified called modification
time, and a time when the le metadata was last modified called change time. Keeping access
time always up to date has significant performance overhead since every read-only access will
incur a write operation. Thus by default every le system updates access time only if current
le access time is older than a day or if it is older than le modification or change time. This
feature is called relative access time and the corresponding mount option is relatime . Updates
of access time can be completely disabled using the noatime mount option, however you need
to verify your applications do not use it. This can be true for le and Web servers or for network
storage. If the default relative access time update policy is not suitable for your applications,
use the strictatime mount option.
Some le systems (for example Ext4) also support lazy time stamp updates. When this feature is
enabled using the lazytime mount option, updates of all time stamps happen in memory but
they are not written to disk. That happens only in response to fsync or sync system calls, when
the le information is written due to another reason such as le size update, when time stamps
are older than 24 hours, or when cached le information needs to be evicted from memory.
To update mount options used for a le system, either edit /etc/fstab directly, or use the
Fstab Options dialog when editing or adding a partition with the YaST Partitioner.

97 File Systems SLED 12 SP3

8.3.3 Prioritizing Disk Access with ionice
The ionice command lets you prioritize disk access for single processes. This enables you to
give less I/O priority to background processes with heavy disk access that are not time-critical,
such as backup jobs. ionice also lets you raise the I/O priority for a specific process to make
sure this process always has immediate access to the disk. The caveat of this feature is that
standard writes are cached in the page cache and are written back to persistent storage only later
by an independent kernel process. Thus the I/O priority setting generally does not apply for these
writes. Also be aware that I/O class and priority setting is obeyed only by CFQ I/O scheduler
(refer to Section 12.2, “Available I/O Elevators”). You can set the following three scheduling classes:

Idle
A process from the idle scheduling class is only granted disk access when no other process
has asked for disk I/O.

Best effort
The default scheduling class used for any process that has not asked for a specific I/O
priority. Priority within this class can be adjusted to a level from 0 to 7 (with 0 being the
highest priority). Programs running at the same best-effort priority are served in a round-
robin fashion. Some kernel versions treat priority within the best-effort class differently—
for details, refer to the ionice(1) man page.

Real-time
Processes in this class are always granted disk access rst. Fine-tune the priority level
from 0 to 7 (with 0 being the highest priority). Use with care, since it can starve other
processes.

For more details and the exact command syntax refer to the ionice(1) man page. If you need
more reliable control over bandwidth available to each application, use Kernel Control Groups
as described in Section 9.3, “Control Group Subsystems”.

98 Prioritizing Disk Access with ionice SLED 12 SP3

9 Kernel Control Groups

Kernel Control Groups (abbreviated known as “cgroups”) are a kernel feature that
allows aggregating or partitioning tasks (processes) and all their children into hier-
archical organized groups. These hierarchical groups can be configured to show a
specialized behavior that helps with tuning the system to make best use of available
hardware and network resources.
In the following sections, we often reference kernel documentation such as /usr/
src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/ . These les are part of the kernel-source
package.
This chapter is an overview. To use cgroups properly and to avoid performance im-
plications, you must study the provided references.

9.1 Technical Overview and Definitions

The following terms are used in this chapter:

“cgroup” is another name for Control Groups.

In a cgroup there is a set of tasks (processes) associated with a set of subsystems that act
as parameters constituting an environment for the tasks.

Subsystems provide the parameters that can be assigned and define CPU sets, freezer, or
—more general—“resource controllers” for memory, disk I/O, network traffic, etc.

cgroups are organized in a tree-structured hierarchy. There can be more than one hierarchy
in the system. You use a different or alternate hierarchy to cope with specific situations.

Every task running in the system is in exactly one of the cgroups in the hierarchy.

99 Technical Overview and Definitions SLED 12 SP3

9.2 Scenario
See the following resource planning scenario for a better understanding (source: /usr/src/
linux/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt ):

CPUs Memory

Top CPU Set (20%) Professors (50%)

System (20%)
CPU Set 1 (60%) CPU Set 2 (20%)

Students (30%)
Professors Students

Network I/O Disk I/O

WWW Browsing (20%) Professors (50%)

Professors (15%) Students (5%) System (20%)

Network File Systems (60%) Students (30%)

Others (20%)

FIGURE 9.1: RESOURCE PLANNING

Web browsers such as Firefox will be part of the Web network class, while the NFS daemons such
as (k)nfsd will be part of the NFS network class. On the other side, Firefox will share appropriate
CPU and memory classes depending on whether a professor or student started it.

9.3 Control Group Subsystems

The following subsystems are available: cpuset , cpu , cpuacct , memory , devices , freezer ,
net_cls , net_prio , blkio , perf_event , and hugetlbt .

100 Scenario SLED 12 SP3

Either mount each subsystem separately, for example:

mkdir /cpuset /cpu

mount -t cgroup -o cpuset none /cpuset
mount -t cgroup -o cpu,cpuacct none /cpu

or all subsystems in one go; you can use an arbitrary device name (for example none ), which
will appear in /proc/mounts , for example:

mount -t cgroup none /sys/fs/cgroup

Some additional information on available subsystems:

net_cls (Identification)
The Network classifier cgroup helps with providing identification for controlling processes
such as Traffic Controller (tc) or Netfilter (iptables). These controller tools can act on
tagged network packets.
For more information, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/net_cls.txt .

net_prio (Identification)
The Network priority cgroup helps with setting the priority of network packets.
For more information, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/net_prio.txt .

devices (Isolation)
A system administrator can provide a list of devices that can be accessed by processes
under cgroups.
It limits access to a device or a le system on a device to only tasks that belong to the
specified cgroup. For more information, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/
devices.txt .

freezer (Control)
The freezer subsystem is useful for high-performance computing clusters (HPC clus-
ters). Use it to freeze (stop) all tasks in a group or to stop tasks, if they reach a de-
fined checkpoint. For more information, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/
freezer-subsystem.txt .
Here are basic commands to use the freezer subsystem:

mount -t cgroup -o freezer freezer /freezer

# Create a child cgroup:
mkdir /freezer/0
# Put a task into this cgroup:
echo $task_pid > /freezer/0/tasks

101 Control Group Subsystems SLED 12 SP3

 # Freeze it:
echo FROZEN > /freezer/0/freezer.state
# Unfreeze (thaw) it:
echo THAWED > /freezer/0/freezer.state

perf_event (Control)
perf_event collects performance data.

cpuset (Isolation)
Use cpuset to tie processes to system subsets of CPUs and memory (“memory nodes”).
For an example, see Section 9.4.2, “Example: Cpusets”.

cpuacct (Accounting)
The CPU accounting controller groups tasks using cgroups and accounts the CPU usage
of these groups. For more information, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/
cpuacct.txt .

memory (Resource Control)

Tracking or limiting memory usage of user space processes.

Control swap usage by setting swapaccount=1 as a kernel boot parameter.

Limit LRU (Least Recently Used) pages.

Anonymous and le cache.

No limits for kernel memory.

Maybe in another subsystem if needed.

Note: Protection from Memory Pressure

Memory cgroup now offers a mechanism allowing easier workload opt-in isolation.
Memory cgroup can define its so called low limit ( memory.low_limit_in_bytes ),
which works as a protection from memory pressure. For workloads that need to
be isolated from outside memory management activity, the value should be set to
the expected Resident Set Size (RSS) plus some head room. If a memory pressure
condition triggers on the system and the particular group is still under its low limit,
its memory is protected from reclaim. As a result, workloads outside of the cgroup
do not need the aforementioned capping.

For more information, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt .

102 Control Group Subsystems SLED 12 SP3

hugetlb (Resource Control)
The HugeTLB controller manages the memory allocated to huge pages.
For more information, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/hugetlb.txt .

cpu (Control)
Share CPU bandwidth between groups with the group scheduling function of CFS (the
scheduler). Mechanically complicated.

Blkio (Resource Control)

The Block IO controller is available as a disk I/O controller. With the blkio controller you
can currently set policies for proportional bandwidth and for throttling.
These are the basic commands to configure proportional weight division of bandwidth by
setting weight values in blkio.weight :

# Setup in /sys/fs/cgroup
mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
mount -t cgroup -o blkio none /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
# Start two cgroups
mkdir -p /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/group1 /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/group2
# Set weights
echo 1000 > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/group1/blkio.weight
echo 500 > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/group2/blkio.weight
# Write the PIDs of the processes to be controlled to the
# appropriate groups
COMMAND1 &
echo $! > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/group1/tasks

COMMAND2 &
echo $! > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/group2/tasks

These are the basic commands to configure throttling or upper limit policy by setting val-
ues in blkio.throttle.read_bps_device for reads and blkio.throttle.write_bp-
s_device for writes:

# Setup in /sys/fs/cgroup
mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
mount -t cgroup -o blkio none /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio
# Bandwidth rate of a device for the root group; format:
# <major>:<minor> <byes_per_second>
echo "8:16 1048576" > /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio/blkio.throttle.read_bps_device

For more information about caveats, usage scenarios, and additional parameters, see /
usr/src/linux/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt .

103 Control Group Subsystems SLED 12 SP3

9.4 Using Controller Groups

9.4.1 Prerequisites
To conveniently use cgroups, install the following additional packages:

libcgroup-tools — basic user space tools to simplify resource management

libcgroup1 — control groups management library

cpuset — contains the cset to manipulate cpusets

libcpuset1 — C API to cpusets

kernel-source — only needed for documentation purposes

9.4.2 Example: Cpusets

With the command line proceed as follows:

1. To determine the number of CPUs and memory nodes see /proc/cpuinfo and /proc/
zoneinfo .

2. Create the cpuset hierarchy as a virtual le system (source: /usr/src/linux/Documen-

tation/cgroups/cpusets.txt ):

mount -t cgroup -ocpuset cpuset /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset

cd /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset
mkdir Charlie
cd Charlie
# List of CPUs in this cpuset:
echo 2-3 > cpuset.cpus
# List of memory nodes in this cpuset:
echo 1 > cpuset.mems
echo $$ > tasks
# The subshell 'sh' is now running in cpuset Charlie
# The next line should display '/Charlie'
cat /proc/self/cpuset

3. Remove the cpuset using shell commands:

rmdir /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset/Charlie

104 Using Controller Groups SLED 12 SP3

 This fails as long as this cpuset is in use. First, you must remove the inside cpusets or tasks
(processes) that belong to it. Check it with:

cat /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset/Charlie/tasks

For background information and additional configuration ags, see /usr/src/linux/Docu-

mentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt .

With the cset tool, proceed as follows:

# Determine the number of CPUs and memory nodes

cset set --list
# Creating the cpuset hierarchy
cset set --cpu=2-3 --mem=1 --set=Charlie
# Starting processes in a cpuset
cset proc --set Charlie --exec -- stress -c 1 &
# Moving existing processes to a cpuset
cset proc --move --pid PID --toset=Charlie
# List task in a cpuset
cset proc --list --set Charlie
# Removing a cpuset
cset set --destroy Charlie

9.4.3 Example: cgroups

Using shell commands, proceed as follows:

1. Create the cgroups hierarchy:

mount -t cgroup cgroup /sys/fs/cgroup

cd /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset/cgroup
mkdir priority
cd priority
cat cpu.shares

2. Understanding cpu.shares:

1024 is the default (for more information, see /Documentation/scheduler/sched-

design-CFS.txt ) = 50% usage

1524 = 60% usage

105 Example: cgroups SLED 12 SP3

 2048 = 67% usage

512 = 40% usage

3. Changing cpu.shares

echo 1024 > cpu.shares

9.4.4 Setting Directory and File Permissions

This is a simple example. Use the following in /etc/cgconfig.conf :

group foo {
perm {
task {
uid = root;
gid = users;
fperm = 660;
}
admin {
uid = root;
gid = root;
fperm = 600;
dperm = 750;
}
}
}

mount {
cpu = /mnt/cgroups/cpu;
}

Then start the cgconfig service and stat /mnt/cgroups/cpu/foo/tasks which should show
the permissions mask 660 with root as an owner and users as a group. stat /mnt/cgroups/
cpu/foo/ should be 750 and all les (but tasks ) should have the mask 600 . Note that fperm
is applied on top of existing le permissions as a mask.
For more information, see the cgconfig.conf man page.

106 Setting Directory and File Permissions SLED 12 SP3

9.5 For More Information
Kernel documentation (package kernel-source ): les in /usr/src/linux/Documenta-
tion/cgroups .

http://lwn.net/Articles/604609/ —Brown, Neil: Control Groups Series (2014, 7 parts).

http://lwn.net/Articles/243795/ —Corbet, Jonathan: Controlling memory use in containers

(2007).

http://lwn.net/Articles/236038/ —Corbet, Jonathan: Process containers (2007).

107 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

10 Automatic Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA)
Balancing

There are physical limitations to hardware that are encountered when many CPU
and lots of memory are required. In this chapter, the important limitation is that
there is limited communication bandwidth between the CPUs and the memory. One
architecture modification that was introduced to address this is Non-Uniform Mem-
ory Access (NUMA).
In this configuration, there are multiple nodes. Each of the nodes contains a subset
of all CPUs and memory. The access speed to main memory is determined by the lo-
cation of the memory relative to the CPU. The performance of a workload depends
on the application threads accessing data that is local to the CPU the thread is exe-
cuting on. Automatic NUMA Balancing is a new feature of SLE 12. Automatic NU-
MA Balancing migrates data on demand to memory nodes that are local to the CPU
accessing that data. Depending on the workload, this can dramatically boost perfor-
mance when using NUMA hardware.

10.1 Implementation
Automatic NUMA balancing happens in three basic steps:

1. A task scanner periodically scans a portion of a task's address space and marks the memory
to force a page fault when the data is next accessed.

2. The next access to the data will result in a NUMA Hinting Fault. Based on this fault, the
data can be migrated to a memory node associated with the task accessing the memory.

3. To keep a task, the CPU it is using and the memory it is accessing together, the scheduler
groups tasks that share data.

The unmapping of data and page fault handling incurs overhead. However, commonly the over-
head will be offset by threads accessing data associated with the CPU.

108 Implementation SLED 12 SP3

10.2 Configuration
Static configuration has been the recommended way of tuning workloads on NUMA hardware
for some time. To do this, memory policies can be set with numactl , taskset or cpusets .
NUMA-aware applications can use special APIs. In cases where the static policies have already
been created, automatic NUMA balancing should be disabled as the data access should already
be local.
numactl --hardware will show the memory configuration of the machine and whether it
supports NUMA or not. This is example output from a 4-node machine.

tux > numactl --hardware

available: 4 nodes (0-3)
node 0 cpus: 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44
node 0 size: 16068 MB
node 0 free: 15909 MB
node 1 cpus: 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 33 37 41 45
node 1 size: 16157 MB
node 1 free: 15948 MB
node 2 cpus: 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 34 38 42 46
node 2 size: 16157 MB
node 2 free: 15981 MB
node 3 cpus: 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 35 39 43 47
node 3 size: 16157 MB
node 3 free: 16028 MB
node distances:
node 0 1 2 3
0: 10 20 20 20
1: 20 10 20 20
2: 20 20 10 20
3: 20 20 20 10

Automatic NUMA balancing can be enabled or disabled for the current session by writing 1
or 0 to /proc/sys/kernel/numa_balancing which will enable or disable the feature respec-
tively. To permanently enable or disable it, use the kernel command line option numa_balanc-
ing=[enabled|disabled] .

If Automatic NUMA Balancing is enabled, the task scanner behavior can be configured. The task
scanner balances the overhead of Automatic NUMA Balancing with the amount of time it takes
to identify the best placement of data.

numa_balancing_scan_delay_ms
The amount of CPU time a thread must consume before its data is scanned. This prevents
creating overhead because of short-lived processes.

109 Configuration SLED 12 SP3

numa_balancing_scan_period_min_ms and numa_balancing_scan_period_max_ms
Controls how frequently a task's data is scanned. Depending on the locality of the faults
the scan rate will increase or decrease. These settings control the min and max scan rates.

numa_balancing_scan_size_mb
Controls how much address space is scanned when the task scanner is active.

10.3 Monitoring
The most important task is to assign metrics to your workload and measure the performance
with Automatic NUMA Balancing enabled and disabled to measure the impact. Profiling tools
can be used to monitor local and remote memory accesses if the CPU supports such monitoring.
Automatic NUMA Balancing activity can be monitored via the following parameters in /proc/
vmstat :

numa_pte_updates
The amount of base pages that were marked for NUMA hinting faults.

numa_huge_pte_updates
The amount of transparent huge pages that were marked for NUMA hinting faults. In
combination with numa_pte_updates the total address space that was marked can be
calculated.

numa_hint_faults
Records how many NUMA hinting faults were trapped.

numa_hint_faults_local
Shows how many of the hinting faults were to local nodes. In combination with numa_hin-
t_faults , the percentage of local versus remote faults can be calculated. A high percent-
age of local hinting faults indicates that the workload is closer to being converged.

numa_pages_migrated
Records how many pages were migrated because they were misplaced. As migration is
a copying operation, it contributes the largest part of the overhead created by NUMA
balancing.

110 Monitoring SLED 12 SP3

10.4 Impact
The following illustrates a simple test case of a 4-node NUMA machine running the SpecJBB
2005 using a single instance of the JVM with no static tuning around memory policies. Note,
however, that the impact for each workload will vary and that this example is based on a pre-
release version of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12.

Balancing disabled Balancing enabled

TPut 1 26629.00 ( 0.00%) 26507.00 ( -0.46%)
TPut 2 55841.00 ( 0.00%) 53592.00 ( -4.03%)
TPut 3 86078.00 ( 0.00%) 86443.00 ( 0.42%)
TPut 4 116764.00 ( 0.00%) 113272.00 ( -2.99%)
TPut 5 143916.00 ( 0.00%) 141581.00 ( -1.62%)
TPut 6 166854.00 ( 0.00%) 166706.00 ( -0.09%)
TPut 7 195992.00 ( 0.00%) 192481.00 ( -1.79%)
TPut 8 222045.00 ( 0.00%) 227143.00 ( 2.30%)
TPut 9 248872.00 ( 0.00%) 250123.00 ( 0.50%)
TPut 10 270934.00 ( 0.00%) 279314.00 ( 3.09%)
TPut 11 297217.00 ( 0.00%) 301878.00 ( 1.57%)
TPut 12 311021.00 ( 0.00%) 326048.00 ( 4.83%)
TPut 13 324145.00 ( 0.00%) 346855.00 ( 7.01%)
TPut 14 345973.00 ( 0.00%) 378741.00 ( 9.47%)
TPut 15 354199.00 ( 0.00%) 394268.00 ( 11.31%)
TPut 16 378016.00 ( 0.00%) 426782.00 ( 12.90%)
TPut 17 392553.00 ( 0.00%) 437772.00 ( 11.52%)
TPut 18 396630.00 ( 0.00%) 456715.00 ( 15.15%)
TPut 19 399114.00 ( 0.00%) 484020.00 ( 21.27%)
TPut 20 413907.00 ( 0.00%) 493618.00 ( 19.26%)
TPut 21 413173.00 ( 0.00%) 510386.00 ( 23.53%)
TPut 22 420256.00 ( 0.00%) 521016.00 ( 23.98%)
TPut 23 425581.00 ( 0.00%) 536214.00 ( 26.00%)
TPut 24 429052.00 ( 0.00%) 532469.00 ( 24.10%)
TPut 25 426127.00 ( 0.00%) 526548.00 ( 23.57%)
TPut 26 422428.00 ( 0.00%) 531994.00 ( 25.94%)
TPut 27 424378.00 ( 0.00%) 488340.00 ( 15.07%)
TPut 28 419338.00 ( 0.00%) 543016.00 ( 29.49%)
TPut 29 403347.00 ( 0.00%) 529178.00 ( 31.20%)
TPut 30 408681.00 ( 0.00%) 510621.00 ( 24.94%)
TPut 31 406496.00 ( 0.00%) 499781.00 ( 22.95%)
TPut 32 404931.00 ( 0.00%) 502313.00 ( 24.05%)
TPut 33 397353.00 ( 0.00%) 522418.00 ( 31.47%)
TPut 34 382271.00 ( 0.00%) 491989.00 ( 28.70%)
TPut 35 388965.00 ( 0.00%) 493012.00 ( 26.75%)
TPut 36 374702.00 ( 0.00%) 502677.00 ( 34.15%)
TPut 37 367578.00 ( 0.00%) 500588.00 ( 36.19%)
TPut 38 367121.00 ( 0.00%) 496977.00 ( 35.37%)

111 Impact SLED 12 SP3

TPut 39 355956.00 ( 0.00%) 489430.00 ( 37.50%)
TPut 40 350855.00 ( 0.00%) 487802.00 ( 39.03%)
TPut 41 345001.00 ( 0.00%) 468021.00 ( 35.66%)
TPut 42 336177.00 ( 0.00%) 462260.00 ( 37.50%)
TPut 43 329169.00 ( 0.00%) 467906.00 ( 42.15%)
TPut 44 329475.00 ( 0.00%) 470784.00 ( 42.89%)
TPut 45 323845.00 ( 0.00%) 450739.00 ( 39.18%)
TPut 46 323878.00 ( 0.00%) 435457.00 ( 34.45%)
TPut 47 310524.00 ( 0.00%) 403914.00 ( 30.07%)
TPut 48 311843.00 ( 0.00%) 459017.00 ( 47.19%)

Balancing Disabled Balancing Enabled

Expctd Warehouse 48.00 ( 0.00%) 48.00 ( 0.00%)
Expctd Peak Bops 310524.00 ( 0.00%) 403914.00 ( 30.07%)
Actual Warehouse 25.00 ( 0.00%) 29.00 ( 16.00%)
Actual Peak Bops 429052.00 ( 0.00%) 543016.00 ( 26.56%)
SpecJBB Bops 6364.00 ( 0.00%) 9368.00 ( 47.20%)
SpecJBB Bops/JVM 6364.00 ( 0.00%) 9368.00 ( 47.20%)

Automatic NUMA Balancing simplifies tuning workloads for high performance on NUMA ma-
chines. Where possible, it is still recommended to statically tune the workload to partition it
within each node. However, in all other cases, automatic NUMA balancing should boost perfor-
mance.

112 Impact SLED 12 SP3

11 Power Management

Power management aims at reducing operating costs for energy and cooling systems
while at the same time keeping the performance of a system at a level that match-
es the current requirements. Thus, power management is always a matter of bal-
ancing the actual performance needs and power saving options for a system. Power
management can be implemented and used at different levels of the system. A set of
specifications for power management functions of devices and the operating system
interface to them has been defined in the Advanced Configuration and Power Inter-
face (ACPI). As power savings in server environments can primarily be achieved at
the processor level, this chapter introduces some main concepts and highlights some
tools for analyzing and influencing relevant parameters.

11.1 Power Management at CPU Level

At the CPU level, you can control power usage in various ways. For example by using idling
power states (C-states), changing CPU frequency (P-states), and throttling the CPU (T-states).
The following sections give a short introduction to each approach and its significance for power
savings. Detailed specifications can be found at http://www.acpi.info/spec.htm .

11.1.1 C-States (Processor Operating States)

Modern processors have several power saving modes called C-states . They reflect the capa-
bility of an idle processor to turn o unused components to save power.
When a processor is in the C0 state, it is executing instructions. A processor running in any other
C-state is idle. The higher the C number, the deeper the CPU sleep mode: more components are
shut down to save power. Deeper sleep states can save large amounts of energy. Their downside
is that they introduce latency. This means, it takes more time for the CPU to go back to C0 .
Depending on workload (threads waking up, triggering CPU usage and then going back to sleep
again for a short period of time) and hardware (for example, interrupt activity of a network
device), disabling the deepest sleep states can significantly increase overall performance. For
details on how to do so, refer to Section 11.3.2, “Viewing Kernel Idle Statistics with cpupower”.

113 Power Management at CPU Level SLED 12 SP3

Some states also have submodes with different power saving latency levels. Which C-states and
submodes are supported depends on the respective processor. However, C1 is always available.
Table 11.1, “C-States” gives an overview of the most common C-states.

TABLE 11.1: C-STATES

Mode Definition

C0 Operational state. CPU fully turned on.

C1 First idle state. Stops CPU main internal

clocks via software. Bus interface unit and
APIC are kept running at full speed.

C2 Stops CPU main internal clocks via hard-

ware. State in which the processor main-
tains all software-visible states, but may take
longer to wake up through interrupts.

C3 Stops all CPU internal clocks. The processor

does not need to keep its cache coherent, but
maintains other states. Some processors have
variations of the C3 state that differ in how
long it takes to wake the processor through
interrupts.

To avoid needless power consumption, it is recommended to test your workloads with deep sleep
states enabled versus deep sleep states disabled. For more information, refer to Section 11.3.2,
“Viewing Kernel Idle Statistics with cpupower” or the cpupower-idle-set(1) man page.

11.1.2 P-States (Processor Performance States)

While a processor operates (in C0 state), it can be in one of several CPU performance states (P-
states) . Whereas C-states are idle states (all but C0), P-states are operational states that
relate to CPU frequency and voltage.
The higher the P-state, the lower the frequency and voltage at which the processor runs. The
number of P-states is processor-specific and the implementation differs across the various types.
However, P0 is always the highest-performance state (except for Section 11.1.3, “Turbo Features”).

114 P-States (Processor Performance States) SLED 12 SP3

Higher P-state numbers represent slower processor speeds and lower power consumption. For
example, a processor in P3 state runs more slowly and uses less power than a processor running
in the P1 state. To operate at any P-state, the processor must be in the C0 state, which means
that it is working and not idling. The CPU P-states are also defined in the ACPI specification,
see http://www.acpi.info/spec.htm .
C-states and P-states can vary independently of one another.

11.1.3 Turbo Features

Turbo features allow to dynamically overtick active CPU cores while other cores are in deep
sleep states. This increases the performance of active threads while still complying with Thermal
Design Power (TDP) limits.
However, the conditions under which a CPU core can use turbo frequencies are architecture-spe-
cific. Learn how to evaluate the efficiency of those new features in Section 11.3, “The cpupower
Tools”.

11.2 In-Kernel Governors

The in-kernel governors belong to the Linux kernel CPUfreq infrastructure and can be used to
dynamically scale processor frequencies at runtime. You can think of the governors as a sort
of preconfigured power scheme for the CPU. The CPUfreq governors use P-states to change
frequencies and lower power consumption. The dynamic governors can switch between CPU
frequencies, based on CPU usage, to allow for power savings while not sacrificing performance.
The following governors are available with the CPUfreq subsystem:

Performance Governor
The CPU frequency is statically set to the highest possible for maximum performance.
Consequently, saving power is not the focus of this governor.
See also Section 11.5.1, “Tuning Options for P-States”.

Powersave Governor
The CPU frequency is statically set to the lowest possible. This can have severe impact on
the performance, as the system will never rise above this frequency no matter how busy
the processors are. An important exception is the intel_pstate which defaults to the
powersave mode. This is due to a hardware-specific decision but functionally it operates
similarly to the on-demand governor.

115 Turbo Features SLED 12 SP3

 However, using this governor often does not lead to the expected power savings as the
highest savings can usually be achieved at idle through entering C-states. With the pow-
ersave governor, processes run at the lowest frequency and thus take longer to finish. This
means it takes longer until the system can go into an idle C-state.
Tuning options: The range of minimum frequencies available to the governor can be ad-
justed (for example, with the cpupower command line tool).

On-demand Governor
The kernel implementation of a dynamic CPU frequency policy: The governor monitors the
processor usage. When it exceeds a certain threshold, the governor will set the frequency
to the highest available. If the usage is less than the threshold, the next lowest frequency
is used. If the system continues to be underemployed, the frequency is again reduced until
the lowest available frequency is set.

Important: Drivers and In-kernel Governors

Not all drivers use the in-kernel governors to dynamically scale power frequency at run-
time. For example, the intel_pstate driver adjusts power frequency itself. Use the
cpupower frequency-info command to nd out which driver your system uses.

11.3 The cpupower Tools

The cpupower tools are designed to give an overview of all CPU power-related parameters that
are supported on a given machine, including turbo (or boost) states. Use the tool set to view
and modify settings of the kernel-related CPUfreq and cpuidle systems and other settings not
related to frequency scaling or idle states. The integrated monitoring framework can access both
kernel-related parameters and hardware statistics. Therefore, it is ideally suited for performance
benchmarks. It also helps you to identify the dependencies between turbo and idle states.
After installing the cpupower package, view the available cpupower subcommands with
cpupower --help . Access the general man page with man cpupower , and the man pages of
the subcommands with man cpupower-SUBCOMMAND .

116 The cpupower Tools SLED 12 SP3

11.3.1 Viewing Current Settings with cpupower
The cpupower  frequency-info command shows the statistics of the cpufreq driver used in
the kernel. Additionally, it shows if turbo (boost) states are supported and enabled in the BIOS.
Run without any options, it shows an output similar to the following:
EXAMPLE 11.1: EXAMPLE OUTPUT OF cpupower frequency-info

root # cpupower frequency-info

analyzing CPU 0:
driver: intel_pstate
CPUs which run at the same hardware frequency: 0
CPUs which need to have their frequency coordinated by software: 0
maximum transition latency: 0.97 ms.
hardware limits: 1.20 GHz - 3.80 GHz
available cpufreq governors: performance, powersave
current policy: frequency should be within 1.20 GHz and 3.80 GHz.
The governor "powersave" may decide which speed to use
within this range.
current CPU frequency is 3.40 GHz (asserted by call to hardware).
boost state support:
Supported: yes
Active: yes
3500 MHz max turbo 4 active cores
3600 MHz max turbo 3 active cores
3600 MHz max turbo 2 active cores
3800 MHz max turbo 1 active cores

To get the current values for all CPUs, use cpupower -c all frequency-info .

11.3.2 Viewing Kernel Idle Statistics with cpupower

The idle-info subcommand shows the statistics of the cpuidle driver used in the kernel. It
works on all architectures that use the cpuidle kernel framework.
EXAMPLE 11.2: EXAMPLE OUTPUT OF cpupower idle-info

root # cpupower idle-info

CPUidle driver: intel_idle
CPUidle governor: menu

Analyzing CPU 0:
Number of idle states: 6
Available idle states: POLL C1-SNB C1E-SNB C3-SNB C6-SNB C7-SNB
POLL:
Flags/Description: CPUIDLE CORE POLL IDLE

117 Viewing Current Settings with cpupower SLED 12 SP3

Latency: 0
Usage: 163128
Duration: 17585669
C1-SNB:
Flags/Description: MWAIT 0x00
Latency: 2
Usage: 16170005
Duration: 697658910
C1E-SNB:
Flags/Description: MWAIT 0x01
Latency: 10
Usage: 4421617
Duration: 757797385
C3-SNB:
Flags/Description: MWAIT 0x10
Latency: 80
Usage: 2135929
Duration: 735042875
C6-SNB:
Flags/Description: MWAIT 0x20
Latency: 104
Usage: 53268
Duration: 229366052
C7-SNB:
Flags/Description: MWAIT 0x30
Latency: 109
Usage: 62593595
Duration: 324631233978

After finding out which processor idle states are supported with cpupower idle-info , indi-
vidual states can be disabled using the cpupower idle-set command. Typically one wants to
disable the deepest sleep state, for example:

cpupower idle-set -d 5

Or, for disabling all CPUs with latencies equal to or higher than 80 :

cpupower idle-set -D 80

11.3.3 Monitoring Kernel and Hardware Statistics with cpupower

Use the monitor subcommand to report processor topology, and monitor frequency and idle
power state statistics over a certain period of time. The default interval is 1 second, but it
can be changed with the -i . Independent processor sleep states and frequency counters are

118 Monitoring Kernel and Hardware Statistics with cpupower SLED 12 SP3
implemented in the tool—some retrieved from kernel statistics, others reading out hardware
registers. The available monitors depend on the underlying hardware and the system. List them
with cpupower monitor -l . For a description of the individual monitors, refer to the cpupow-
er-monitor man page.
The monitor subcommand allows you to execute performance benchmarks. To compare kernel
statistics with hardware statistics for specific workloads, concatenate the respective command,
for example:

cpupower monitor db_test.sh

EXAMPLE 11.3: EXAMPLE cpupower monitor OUTPUT

root # cpupower monitor

|Mperf || Idle_Stats
1   2  
CPU | C0 | Cx | Freq || POLL | C1 | C2 | C3
0| 3.71| 96.29| 2833|| 0.00| 0.00| 0.02| 96.32
1| 100.0| -0.00| 2833|| 0.00| 0.00| 0.00| 0.00
2| 9.06| 90.94| 1983|| 0.00| 7.69| 6.98| 76.45
3| 7.43| 92.57| 2039|| 0.00| 2.60| 12.62| 77.52

1 Mperf shows the average frequency of a CPU, including boost frequencies, over time.
Additionally, it shows the percentage of time the CPU has been active ( C0 ) or in any
sleep state ( Cx ). As the turbo states are managed by the BIOS, it is impossible to get
the frequency values at a given instant. On modern processors with turbo features
the Mperf monitor is the only way to nd out about the frequency a certain CPU has
been running in.
2 Idle_Stats shows the statistics of the cpuidle kernel subsystem. The kernel updates
these values every time an idle state is entered or left. Therefore there can be some
inaccuracy when cores are in an idle state for some time when the measure starts
or ends.
Apart from the (general) monitors in the example above, other architecture-specific mon-
itors are available. For detailed information, refer to the cpupower-monitor man page.

By comparing the values of the individual monitors, you can nd correlations and dependen-
cies and evaluate how well the power saving mechanism works for a certain workload. In Exam-
ple 11.3 you can see that CPU 0 is idle (the value of Cx is near 100%), but runs at a very high
frequency. This is because the CPUs 0 and 1 have the same frequency values which means that
there is a dependency between them.

119 Monitoring Kernel and Hardware Statistics with cpupower SLED 12 SP3
11.3.4 Modifying Current Settings with cpupower
You can use cpupower frequency-set command as root to modify current settings. It allows
you to set values for the minimum or maximum CPU frequency the governor may select or to
create a new governor. With the -c option, you can also specify for which of the processors the
settings should be modified. That makes it easy to use a consistent policy across all processors
without adjusting the settings for each processor individually. For more details and the available
options, refer to the cpupower-freqency-set man page or run cpupower  frequency-set
--help .

11.4 Monitoring Power Consumption with powerTOP

You can monitor system power consumption with powerTOP. It helps you to identify the reasons
for unnecessary high power consumption (for example, processes that are mainly responsible
for waking up a processor from its idle state) and to optimize your system settings to avoid
these. It supports both Intel and AMD processors. The powertop package is available from the
SUSE Linux Enterprise SDK.
The SDK is a module for SUSE Linux Enterprise and is available via an online channel from
the SUSE Customer Center. Alternatively, go to http://download.suse.com/ , search for SUSE
Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit and download it from there. Refer to Book
“Deployment Guide”, Chapter 10 “Installing Modules, Extensions, and Third Party Add-On Products” for
details.
powerTOP combines various sources of information (analysis of programs, device drivers, kernel
options, amounts and sources of interrupts waking up processors from sleep states) and shows
them in one screen. Example 11.4, “Example powerTOP Output” shows which information categories
are available:

EXAMPLE 11.4: EXAMPLE POWERTOP OUTPUT

Cn Avg residency P-states (frequencies)

1   2   3   4   5

C0 (cpu running) (11.6%) 2.00 Ghz 0.1%

polling 0.0ms ( 0.0%) 2.00 Ghz 0.0%
C1 4.4ms (57.3%) 1.87 Ghz 0.0%
C2 10.0ms (31.1%) 1064 Mhz 99.9%

Wakeups-from-idle per second : 11.2 interval: 5.0s 6

no ACPI power usage estimate available 7

120 Modifying Current Settings with cpupower SLED 12 SP3

Top causes for wakeups: 8

96.2% (826.0) <interrupt> : extra timer interrupt

0.9% ( 8.0) <kernel core> : usb_hcd_poll_rh_status (rh_timer_func)
0.3% ( 2.4) <interrupt> : megasas
0.2% ( 2.0) <kernel core> : clocksource_watchdog (clocksource_watchdog)
0.2% ( 1.6) <interrupt> : eth1-TxRx-0
0.1% ( 1.0) <interrupt> : eth1-TxRx-4

[...]

Suggestion: 9 Enable SATA ALPM link power management via:

echo min_power > /sys/class/scsi_host/host0/link_power_management_policy
or press the S key.

1 The column shows the C-states. When working, the CPU is in state 0 , when resting it is
in some state greater than 0 , depending on which C-states are available and how deep
the CPU is sleeping.
2 The column shows average time in milliseconds spent in the particular C-state.
3 The column shows the percentages of time spent in various C-states. For considerable power
savings during idle, the CPU should be in deeper C-states most of the time. In addition, the
longer the average time spent in these C-states, the more power is saved.
4 The column shows the frequencies the processor and kernel driver support on your system.
5 The column shows the amount of time the CPU cores stayed in different frequencies during
the measuring period.
6 Shows how often the CPU is awoken per second (number of interrupts). The lower the
number, the better. The interval value is the powerTOP refresh interval which can be
controlled with the -t option. The default time to gather data is 5 seconds.
7 When running powerTOP on a laptop, this line displays the ACPI information on how much
power is currently being used and the estimated time until discharge of the battery. On
servers, this information is not available.
8 Shows what is causing the system to be more active than needed. powerTOP displays the
top items causing your CPU to awake during the sampling period.
9 Suggestions on how to improve power usage for this machine.

For more information, refer to the powerTOP project page at https://01.org/powertop .

121 Monitoring Power Consumption with powerTOP SLED 12 SP3

11.5 Special Tuning Options
The following sections highlight important settings.

11.5.1 Tuning Options for P-States

The CPUfreq subsystem offers several tuning options for P-states: You can switch between the
different governors, influence minimum or maximum CPU frequency to be used or change in-
dividual governor parameters.
To switch to another governor at runtime, use cpupower frequency-set with the -g option.
For example, running the following command (as root ) will activate the performance governor:

cpupower frequency-set -g performance

To set values for the minimum or maximum CPU frequency the governor may select, use the
-d or -u option, respectively.

11.6 Troubleshooting
BIOS options enabled?
To use C-states or P-states, check your BIOS options:

To use C-states, make sure to enable CPU C State or similar options to benefit from
power savings at idle.

To use P-states and the CPUfreq governors, make sure to enable Processor Per-
formance States options or similar.

Even if P-states and C-states are available, it is possible that the platform rmware is
managing CPU frequencies which may be sub-optimal. For example, if pcc-cpufreq
is loaded then the OS is only giving hints to the rmware, which is free to ignore
the hints. This can be addressed by selecting "OS Management" or similar for CPU
frequency managed in the BIOS. After reboot, an alternative driver will be used but
the performance impact should be carefully measured.

In case of a CPU upgrade, make sure to upgrade your BIOS, too. The BIOS needs to know
the new CPU and its frequency stepping to pass this information on to the operating system.

122 Special Tuning Options SLED 12 SP3

Log file information?
Check the systemd journal (see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 16 “journalctl: Query
the systemd Journal”) for any output regarding the CPUfreq subsystem. Only severe errors
are reported there.
If you suspect problems with the CPUfreq subsystem on your machine, you can also enable
additional debug output. To do so, either use cpufreq.debug=7 as boot parameter or
execute the following command as root :

echo 7 > /sys/module/cpufreq/parameters/debug

This will cause CPUfreq to log more information to dmesg on state transitions, which is
useful for diagnosis. But as this additional output of kernel messages can be rather com-
prehensive, use it only if you are fairly sure that a problem exists.

11.7 For More Information

Platforms with a Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) may have additional power manage-
ment configuration options accessible via the service processor. These configurations are ven-
dor specific and therefore not subject of this guide. For more information, refer to the manuals
provided by your vendor.
For more information about powerTOP, refer to https://01.org/powertop .

123 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

V Kernel Tuning

12 Tuning I/O Performance 125

13 Tuning the Task Scheduler 133

14 Tuning the Memory Management Subsystem 145

15 Tuning the Network 158

12 Tuning I/O Performance

I/O scheduling controls how input/output operations will be submitted to storage. SUSE Linux
Enterprise Desktop offers various I/O algorithms—called elevators —suiting different work-
loads. Elevators can help to reduce seek operations and can prioritize I/O requests.
Choosing the best suited I/O elevator not only depends on the workload, but on the hardware,
too. Single ATA disk systems, SSDs, RAID arrays, or network storage systems, for example, each
require different tuning strategies.

12.1 Switching I/O Scheduling

SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop picks a default I/O scheduler at boot-time, which can be changed
on the y per block device. This makes it possible to set different algorithms, for example, for
the device hosting the system partition and the device hosting a database.
The default I/O scheduler is chosen for each device based on whether the device reports to
be rotational disk or not. For non-rotational disks DEADLINE I/O scheduler is picked. Other
devices default to CFQ (Completely Fair Queuing). To change this default, use the following
boot parameter:

elevator=SCHEDULER

Replace SCHEDULER with one of the values cfq , noop , or deadline . See Section 12.2, “Available
I/O Elevators” for details.

To change the elevator for a specific device in the running system, run the following command:

echo SCHEDULER > /sys/block/DEVICE/queue/scheduler

Here, SCHEDULER is one of cfq , noop , or deadline . DEVICE is the block device ( sda for
example). Note that this change will not persist during reboot. For permanent I/O scheduler
change for a particular device either place the command switching the I/O scheduler into init
scripts or add appropriate udev rule into /lib/udev/rules.d/ . See /lib/udev/rules.d/60-
ssd-scheduler.rules for an example of such tuning.

125 Switching I/O Scheduling SLED 12 SP3

12.2 Available I/O Elevators
In the following elevators available on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop are listed. Each elevator
has a set of tunable parameters, which can be set with the following command:

echo VALUE > /sys/block/DEVICE/queue/iosched/TUNABLE

where VALUE is the desired value for the TUNABLE and DEVICE the block device.
To nd out which elevator is the current default, run the following command. The currently
selected scheduler is listed in brackets:

jupiter:~ # cat /sys/block/sda/queue/scheduler

noop deadline [cfq]

This le can also contain the string none meaning that I/O scheduling does not happen for
this device. This is usually because the device uses multi-queue queueing mechanism (refer to
Section 12.4, “Enable blk-mq I/O Path for SCSI by Default”).

12.2.1 CFQ (Completely Fair Queuing)

CFQ is a fairness-oriented scheduler and is used by default on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop.
The algorithm assigns each thread a time slice in which it is allowed to submit I/O to disk. This
way each thread gets a fair share of I/O throughput. It also allows assigning tasks I/O priorities
which are taken into account during scheduling decisions (see Section 8.3.3, “Prioritizing Disk Access
with ionice”). The CFQ scheduler has the following tunable parameters:

/sys/block/DEVICE/queue/iosched/slice_idle_us
When a task has no more I/O to submit in its time slice, the I/O scheduler waits for a while
before scheduling the next thread. The slice_idle_us is the time in microseconds the
I/O scheduler waits. File slice_idle controls the same tunable but in millisecond units.
Waiting for more I/O from a thread can improve locality of I/O. Additionally, it avoids
starving processes doing dependent I/O. A process does dependent I/O if it needs a result
of one I/O to submit another I/O. For example, if you rst need to read an index block to
nd out a data block to read, these two reads form a dependent I/O.
For media where locality does not play a big role (SSDs, SANs with lots of disks) setting /
sys/block/<device>/queue/iosched/slice_idle_us to 0 can improve the throughput
considerably.

126 Available I/O Elevators SLED 12 SP3

 /sys/block/DEVICE/queue/iosched/quantum
This option limits the maximum number of requests that are being processed at once by
the device. The default value is 4 . For a storage with several disks, this setting can unnec-
essarily limit parallel processing of requests. Therefore, increasing the value can improve
performance. However, it can also cause latency of certain I/O operations to increase be-
cause more requests are buered inside the storage. When changing this value, you can
also consider tuning /sys/block/DEVICE/queue/iosched/slice_async_rq (the default
value is 2 ). This limits the maximum number of asynchronous requests—usually write
requests—that are submitted in one time slice.

/sys/block/DEVICE/queue/iosched/low_latency
When enabled (which is the default on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop) the scheduler may
dynamically adjust the length of the time slice by aiming to meet a tuning parameter
called the target_latency . Time slices are recomputed to meet this target_latency
and ensure that processes get fair access within a bounded length of time.

/sys/block/DEVICE/queue/iosched/target_latency
Contains an estimated latency time for the CFQ . CFQ will use it to calculate the time slice
used for every task.

/sys/block/DEVICE/queue/iosched/group_idle_us
To avoid starving of blkio cgroups doing dependent I/O, CFQ waits a bit after comple-
tion of I/O for one blkio cgroup before scheduling I/O for a different blkio cgroup. When
slice_idle_us is set, this parameter does not have a big impact. However, for fast media,
the overhead of slice_idle_us is generally undesirable. Disabling slice_idle_us and
setting group_idle_us is a method to avoid starvation of blkio cgroups doing dependent
I/O with lower overhead. Note that the le group_idle controls the same tunable how-
ever with millisecond granularity.

EXAMPLE 12.1: INCREASING INDIVIDUAL THREAD THROUGHPUT USING CFQ

In SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP3, the low_latency tuning parameter is enabled
by default to ensure that processes get fair access within a bounded length of time. (Note
that this parameter was not enabled in versions prior to SUSE Linux Enterprise 12.)

127 CFQ (Completely Fair Queuing) SLED 12 SP3

 This is usually preferred in a server scenario where processes are executing I/O as part
of transactions, as it makes the time needed for each transaction predictable. However,
there are scenarios where that is not the desired behavior:

If the performance metric of interest is the peak performance of a single process

when there is I/O contention.

If a workload must complete as quickly as possible and there are multiple sources of
I/O. In this case, unfair treatment from the I/O scheduler may allow the transactions
to complete faster: Processes take their full slice and exit quickly, resulting in reduced
overall contention.

To address this, there are two options—increase target_latency or disable low_la-

tency . As with all tuning parameters it is important to verify your workload behaves
as expected before and after the tuning modification. Take careful note of whether your
workload depends on individual process peak performance or scales better with fairness.
It should also be noted that the performance will depend on the underlying storage and
the correct tuning option for one installation may not be universally true.
Find below an example that does not control when I/O starts but is simple enough to
demonstrate the point. 32 processes are writing a small amount of data to disk in parallel.
Using the SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop default (enabling low_latency ), the result looks
as follows:

root # echo 1 > /sys/block/sda/queue/iosched/low_latency

root # time ./dd-test.sh
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.62464 s, 4.0 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.29624 s, 3.2 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.56341 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.56908 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.53043 s, 3.0 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.57511 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.53672 s, 3.0 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.5433 s, 3.0 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.65474 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.63694 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.90122 s, 2.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.88507 s, 2.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.86135 s, 2.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.84553 s, 2.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.88871 s, 2.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.94943 s, 2.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.12731 s, 2.5 MB/s

128 CFQ (Completely Fair Queuing) SLED 12 SP3

 10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.15106 s, 2.5 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.21601 s, 2.5 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.35004 s, 2.4 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.33387 s, 2.4 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.55434 s, 2.3 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.52283 s, 2.3 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.52682 s, 2.3 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.56176 s, 2.3 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.62727 s, 2.3 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.78958 s, 2.2 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.79772 s, 2.2 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.78004 s, 2.2 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.77994 s, 2.2 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.86114 s, 2.2 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.88062 s, 2.1 MB/s

real 0m4.978s
user 0m0.112s
sys 0m1.544s

Note that each process completes in similar times. This is the CFQ scheduler meeting its
target_latency : Each process has fair access to storage.

Note that the earlier processes complete somewhat faster. This happens because the start
time of the processes is not identical. In a more complicated example, it is possible to
control for this.
This is what happens when low_latency is disabled:

root # echo 0 > /sys/block/sda/queue/iosched/low_latency

root # time ./dd-test.sh
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 0.813519 s, 12.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 0.788106 s, 13.3 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 0.800404 s, 13.1 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 0.816398 s, 12.8 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 0.959087 s, 10.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.09563 s, 9.6 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.18716 s, 8.8 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.27661 s, 8.2 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.46312 s, 7.2 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.55489 s, 6.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.64277 s, 6.4 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.78196 s, 5.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.87496 s, 5.6 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 1.9461 s, 5.4 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.08351 s, 5.0 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.28003 s, 4.6 MB/s

129 CFQ (Completely Fair Queuing) SLED 12 SP3

 10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.42979 s, 4.3 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.54564 s, 4.1 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.6411 s, 4.0 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.75171 s, 3.8 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.86162 s, 3.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 2.98453 s, 3.5 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.13723 s, 3.3 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.36399 s, 3.1 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.60018 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.58151 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.67385 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.69471 s, 2.8 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.66658 s, 2.9 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 3.81495 s, 2.7 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.10172 s, 2.6 MB/s
10485760 bytes (10 MB) copied, 4.0966 s, 2.6 MB/s

real 0m3.505s
user 0m0.160s
sys 0m1.516s

Note that the time processes take to complete is spread much wider as processes are not
getting fair access. Some processes complete faster and exit, allowing the total workload
to complete faster, and some processes measure higher apparent I/O performance. It is
also important to note that this example may not behave similarly on all systems as the
results depend on the resources of the machine and the underlying storage.
It is important to emphasize that neither tuning option is inherently better than the other.
Both are best in different circumstances and it is important to understand the requirements
of your workload and tune accordingly.

12.2.2 NOOP
A trivial scheduler that only passes down the I/O that comes to it. Useful for checking whether
complex I/O scheduling decisions of other schedulers are causing I/O performance regressions.
This scheduler is recommended for setups with devices that do I/O scheduling themselves, such
as intelligent storage or in multipathing environments. If you choose a more complicated sched-
uler on the host, the scheduler of the host and the scheduler of the storage device compete with
each other. This can decrease performance. The storage device can usually determine best how
to schedule I/O.
For similar reasons, this scheduler is also recommended for use within virtual machines.

130 NOOP SLED 12 SP3

The NOOP scheduler can be useful for devices that do not depend on mechanical movement,
like SSDs. Usually, the DEADLINE I/O scheduler is a better choice for these devices. However,
NOOP creates less overhead and thus can on certain workloads increase performance.

12.2.3 DEADLINE
DEADLINE is a latency-oriented I/O scheduler. Each I/O request is assigned a deadline. Usual-
ly, requests are stored in queues (read and write) sorted by sector numbers. The DEADLINE
algorithm maintains two additional queues (read and write) in which requests are sorted by
deadline. As long as no request has timed out, the “sector” queue is used. When timeouts occur,
requests from the “deadline” queue are served until there are no more expired requests. Gener-
ally, the algorithm prefers reads over writes.
This scheduler can provide a superior throughput over the CFQ I/O scheduler in cases where
several threads read and write and fairness is not an issue. For example, for several parallel
readers from a SAN and for databases (especially when using “TCQ” disks). The DEADLINE
scheduler has the following tunable parameters:

/sys/block/<device>/queue/iosched/writes_starved
Controls how many reads can be sent to disk before it is possible to send writes. A value
of 3 means, that three read operations are carried out for one write operation.

/sys/block/<device>/queue/iosched/read_expire
Sets the deadline (current time plus the read_expire value) for read operations in millisec-
onds. The default is 500.

/sys/block/<device>/queue/iosched/write_expire
/sys/block/<device>/queue/iosched/read_expire Sets the deadline (current time
plus the read_expire value) for read operations in milliseconds. The default is 500.

12.3 I/O Barrier Tuning

Most le systems (such as XFS, Ext3, Ext4, or reiserfs) send write barriers to disk after fsync or
during transaction commits. Write barriers enforce proper ordering of writes, making volatile
disk write caches safe to use (at some performance penalty). If your disks are battery-backed in
one way or another, disabling barriers can safely improve performance.
Sending write barriers can be disabled using the nobarrier mount option.

131 DEADLINE SLED 12 SP3

 Warning: Disabling Barriers Can Lead to Data Loss
Disabling barriers when disks cannot guarantee caches are properly written in case of
power failure can lead to severe le system corruption and data loss.

12.4 Enable blk-mq I/O Path for SCSI by Default

Block multiqueue (blk-mq) is a multi-queue block I/O queueing mechanism. Blk-mq uses per-
cpu software queues to queue I/O requests. The software queues are mapped to one or more
hardware submission queues. Blk-mq significantly reduces lock contention. In particular blk-
mq improves performance for devices that support a high number of input/output operations
per second (IOPS). Blk-mq is already the default for some devices, for example, NVM Express
devices.
Currently blk-mq has no I/O scheduling support (no CFQ, no deadline I/O scheduler). This lack
of I/O scheduling can cause significant performance degradation when spinning disks are used.
Therefore blk-mq is not enabled by default for SCSI devices.
If you have fast SCSI devices (for example, SSDs) instead of SCSI hard disks attached to your
system, consider switching to blk-mq for SCSI. This is done using the kernel command line
option scsi_mod.use_blk_mq=1 .

132 Enable blk-mq I/O Path for SCSI by Default SLED 12 SP3
13 Tuning the Task Scheduler

Modern operating systems, such as SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop, normally run many tasks
at the same time. For example, you can be searching in a text le while receiving an e-mail
and copying a big le to an external hard disk. These simple tasks require many additional
processes to be run by the system. To provide each task with its required system resources, the
Linux kernel needs a tool to distribute available system resources to individual tasks. And this
is exactly what the task scheduler does.
The following sections explain the most important terms related to a process scheduling. They
also introduce information about the task scheduler policy, scheduling algorithm, description
of the task scheduler used by SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop, and references to other sources
of relevant information.

13.1 Introduction
The Linux kernel controls the way that tasks (or processes) are managed on the system. The
task scheduler, sometimes called process scheduler, is the part of the kernel that decides which
task to run next. It is responsible for best using system resources to guarantee that multiple
tasks are being executed simultaneously. This makes it a core component of any multitasking
operating system.

13.1.1 Preemption
The theory behind task scheduling is very simple. If there are runnable processes in a system, at
least one process must always be running. If there are more runnable processes than processors
in a system, not all the processes can be running all the time.
Therefore, some processes need to be stopped temporarily, or suspended, so that others can be
running again. The scheduler decides what process in the queue will run next.
As already mentioned, Linux, like all other Unix variants, is a multitasking operating system. That
means that several tasks can be running at the same time. Linux provides a so called preemptive
multitasking, where the scheduler decides when a process is suspended. This forced suspension
is called preemption. All Unix flavors have been providing preemptive multitasking since the
beginning.

133 Introduction SLED 12 SP3

13.1.2 Timeslice
The time period for which a process will be running before it is preempted is defined in advance.
It is called a timeslice of a process and represents the amount of processor time that is provided
to each process. By assigning timeslices, the scheduler makes global decisions for the running
system, and prevents individual processes from dominating over the processor resources.

13.1.3 Process Priority

The scheduler evaluates processes based on their priority. To calculate the current priority of a
process, the task scheduler uses complex algorithms. As a result, each process is given a value
according to which it is “allowed” to run on a processor.

13.2 Process Classification

Processes are usually classified according to their purpose and behavior. Although the borderline
is not always clearly distinct, generally two criteria are used to sort them. These criteria are
independent and do not exclude each other.
One approach is to classify a process either I/O-bound or processor-bound.

I/O-bound
I/O stands for Input/Output devices, such as keyboards, mice, or optical and hard disks.
I/O-bound processes spend the majority of time submitting and waiting for requests. They
are run very frequently, but for short time intervals, not to block other processes waiting
for I/O requests.

processor-bound
On the other hand, processor-bound tasks use their time to execute a code, and usually run
until they are preempted by the scheduler. They do not block processes waiting for I/O
requests, and, therefore, can be run less frequently but for longer time intervals.

Another approach is to divide processes by type into interactive, batch, and real-time processes.

134 Timeslice SLED 12 SP3

 Interactive processes spend a lot of time waiting for I/O requests, such as keyboard or
mouse operations. The scheduler must wake up such processes quickly on user request,
or the user will nd the environment unresponsive. The typical delay is approximately
100 ms. Office applications, text editors or image manipulation programs represent typical
interactive processes.

Batch processes often run in the background and do not need to be responsive. They usually
receive lower priority from the scheduler. Multimedia converters, database search engines,
or log les analyzers are typical examples of batch processes.

Real-time processes must never be blocked by low-priority processes, and the scheduler
guarantees a short response time to them. Applications for editing multimedia content are
a good example here.

13.3 Completely Fair Scheduler

Since the Linux kernel version 2.6.23, a new approach has been taken to the scheduling of
runnable processes. Completely Fair Scheduler (CFS) became the default Linux kernel sched-
uler. Since then, important changes and improvements have been made. The information in
this chapter applies to SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop with kernel version 2.6.32 and higher
(including 3.x kernels). The scheduler environment was divided into several parts, and three
main new features were introduced:

Modular Scheduler Core

The core of the scheduler was enhanced with scheduling classes. These classes are modular
and represent scheduling policies.

Completely Fair Scheduler

Introduced in kernel 2.6.23 and extended in 2.6.24, CFS tries to assure that each process
obtains its “fair” share of the processor time.

Group Scheduling
For example, if you split processes into groups according to which user is running them,
CFS tries to provide each of these groups with the same amount of processor time.

As a result, CFS brings optimized scheduling for both servers and desktops.

135 Completely Fair Scheduler SLED 12 SP3

13.3.1 How CFS Works
CFS tries to guarantee a fair approach to each runnable task. To nd the most balanced way of
task scheduling, it uses the concept of red-black tree. A red-black tree is a type of self-balancing
data search tree which provides inserting and removing entries in a reasonable way so that
it remains well balanced. For more information, see the wiki pages of Red-black tree (http://
en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Red_black_tree) .
When CFS schedules a task it accumulates “virtual runtime” or vruntime. The next task picked
to run is always the task with the minimum accumulated vruntime so far. By balancing the red-
black tree when tasks are inserted into the run queue (a planned time line of processes to be
executed next), the task with the minimum vruntime is always the rst entry in the red-black
tree.
The amount of vruntime a task accrues is related to its priority. High priority tasks gain vruntime
at a slower rate than low priority tasks, which results in high priority tasks being picked to run
on the processor more often.

13.3.2 Grouping Processes

Since the Linux kernel version 2.6.24, CFS can be tuned to be fair to groups rather than to tasks
only. Runnable tasks are then grouped to form entities, and CFS tries to be fair to these entities
instead of individual runnable tasks. The scheduler also tries to be fair to individual tasks within
these entities.
The kernel scheduler lets you group runnable tasks using control groups. For more information,
see Chapter 9, Kernel Control Groups.

13.3.3 Kernel Configuration Options

Basic aspects of the task scheduler behavior can be set through the kernel configuration op-
tions. Setting these options is part of the kernel compilation process. Because kernel compilation
process is a complex task and out of this document's scope, refer to relevant source of informa-
tion.

136 How CFS Works SLED 12 SP3

 Warning: Kernel Compilation
If you run SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop on a kernel that was not shipped with it, for
example on a self-compiled kernel, you lose the entire support entitlement.

13.3.4 Terminology
Documents regarding task scheduling policy often use several technical terms which you need
to know to understand the information correctly. Here are some:

Latency
Delay between the time a process is scheduled to run and the actual process execution.

Granularity
The relation between granularity and latency can be expressed by the following equation:

gran = ( lat / rtasks ) - ( lat / rtasks / rtasks )

where gran stands for granularity, lat stand for latency, and rtasks is the number of running
tasks.

13.3.4.1 Scheduling Policies

The Linux kernel supports the following scheduling policies:

SCHED_FIFO
Scheduling policy designed for special time-critical applications. It uses the First In-First
Out scheduling algorithm.

SCHED_BATCH
Scheduling policy designed for CPU-intensive tasks.

SCHED_IDLE
Scheduling policy intended for very low prioritized tasks.

SCHED_OTHER
Default Linux time-sharing scheduling policy used by the majority of processes.

SCHED_RR
Similar to SCHED_FIFO , but uses the Round Robin scheduling algorithm.

137 Terminology SLED 12 SP3

13.3.5 Changing Real-time Attributes of Processes with chrt
The chrt command sets or retrieves the real-time scheduling attributes of a running process,
or runs a command with the specified attributes. You can get or retrieve both the scheduling
policy and priority of a process.
In the following examples, a process whose PID is 16244 is used.
To retrieve the real-time attributes of an existing task:

root # chrt -p 16244

pid 16244's current scheduling policy: SCHED_OTHER
pid 16244's current scheduling priority: 0

Before setting a new scheduling policy on the process, you need to nd out the minimum and
maximum valid priorities for each scheduling algorithm:

root # chrt -m
SCHED_SCHED_OTHER min/max priority : 0/0
SCHED_SCHED_FIFO min/max priority : 1/99
SCHED_SCHED_RR min/max priority : 1/99
SCHED_SCHED_BATCH min/max priority : 0/0
SCHED_SCHED_IDLE min/max priority : 0/0

In the above example, SCHED_OTHER, SCHED_BATCH, SCHED_IDLE polices only allow for pri-
ority 0, while that of SCHED_FIFO and SCHED_RR can range from 1 to 99.
To set SCHED_BATCH scheduling policy:

root # chrt -b -p 0 16244

pid 16244's current scheduling policy: SCHED_BATCH
pid 16244's current scheduling priority: 0

For more information on chrt , see its man page ( man 1 chrt ).

13.3.6 Runtime Tuning with sysctl

The sysctl interface for examining and changing kernel parameters at runtime introduces im-
portant variables by means of which you can change the default behavior of the task scheduler.
The syntax of the sysctl is simple, and all the following commands must be entered on the
command line as root .
To read a value from a kernel variable, enter

sysctl VARIABLE

138 Changing Real-time Attributes of Processes with chrt SLED 12 SP3

To assign a value, enter

sysctl VARIABLE=VALUE

To get a list of all scheduler related sysctl variables, enter

sysctl -A | grep "sched" | grep -v"domain"

root # sysctl -A | grep "sched" | grep -v "domain"

kernel.sched_cfs_bandwidth_slice_us = 5000
kernel.sched_child_runs_first = 0
kernel.sched_compat_yield = 0
kernel.sched_latency_ns = 24000000
kernel.sched_migration_cost_ns = 500000
kernel.sched_min_granularity_ns = 8000000
kernel.sched_nr_migrate = 32
kernel.sched_rr_timeslice_ms = 25
kernel.sched_rt_period_us = 1000000
kernel.sched_rt_runtime_us = 950000
kernel.sched_schedstats = 0
kernel.sched_shares_window_ns = 10000000
kernel.sched_time_avg_ms = 1000
kernel.sched_tunable_scaling = 1
kernel.sched_wakeup_granularity_ns = 10000000

Note that variables ending with “_ns” and “_us” accept values in nanoseconds and microseconds,
respectively.
A list of the most important task scheduler sysctl tuning variables (located at /proc/sys/
kernel/ ) with a short description follows:

sched_cfs_bandwidth_slice_us
When CFS bandwidth control is in use, this parameter controls the amount of run-time
(bandwidth) transferred to a run queue from the task's control group bandwidth pool.
Small values allow the global bandwidth to be shared in a ne-grained manner among
tasks, larger values reduce transfer overhead. See https://www.kernel.org/doc/Documenta-
tion/scheduler/sched-bwc.txt .

sched_child_runs_first
A freshly forked child runs before the parent continues execution. Setting this parameter
to 1 is beneficial for an application in which the child performs an execution after fork.
For example make -j<NO_CPUS> performs better when sched_child_runs_first is turned
o. The default value is 0 .

139 Runtime Tuning with sysctl SLED 12 SP3

sched_compat_yield
Enables the aggressive CPU yielding behavior of the old O(1) scheduler by moving the
relinquishing task to the end of the runnable queue (right-most position in the red-black
tree). Applications that depend on the sched_yield(2) syscall behavior may see perfor-
mance improvements by giving other processes a chance to run when there are highly
contended resources (such as locks). On the other hand, given that this call occurs in con-
text switching, misusing the call can hurt the workload. Only use it when you see a drop
in performance. The default value is 0 .

sched_migration_cost_ns
Amount of time after the last execution that a task is considered to be “cache hot” in
migration decisions. A “hot” task is less likely to be migrated to another CPU, so increasing
this variable reduces task migrations. The default value is 500000 (ns).
If the CPU idle time is higher than expected when there are runnable processes, try reduc-
ing this value. If tasks bounce between CPUs or nodes too often, try increasing it.

sched_latency_ns
Targeted preemption latency for CPU bound tasks. Increasing this variable increases a CPU
bound task's timeslice. A task's timeslice is its weighted fair share of the scheduling period:
timeslice = scheduling period * (task's weight/total weight of tasks in the run queue)
The task's weight depends on the task's nice level and the scheduling policy. Minimum
task weight for a SCHED_OTHER task is 15, corresponding to nice 19. The maximum task
weight is 88761, corresponding to nice -20.
Timeslices become smaller as the load increases. When the number of runnable
tasks exceeds sched_latency_ns / sched_min_granularity_ns , the slice becomes num-
ber_of_running_tasks * sched_min_granularity_ns . Prior to that, the slice is equal to
sched_latency_ns .
This value also specifies the maximum amount of time during which a sleeping task is
considered to be running for entitlement calculations. Increasing this variable increases
the amount of time a waking task may consume before being preempted, thus increasing
scheduler latency for CPU bound tasks. The default value is 6000000 (ns).

sched_min_granularity_ns
Minimal preemption granularity for CPU bound tasks. See sched_latency_ns for details.
The default value is 4000000 (ns).

140 Runtime Tuning with sysctl SLED 12 SP3

sched_wakeup_granularity_ns
The wake-up preemption granularity. Increasing this variable reduces wake-up preemp-
tion, reducing disturbance of compute bound tasks. Lowering it improves wake-up latency
and throughput for latency critical tasks, particularly when a short duty cycle load com-
ponent must compete with CPU bound components. The default value is 2500000 (ns).

Warning: Setting the Right Wake-up Granularity Value

Settings larger than half of sched_latency_ns will result in no wake-up preemp-
tion. Short duty cycle tasks will be unable to compete with CPU hogs effectively.

sched_rr_timeslice_ms
Quantum that SCHED_RR tasks are allowed to run before they are preempted and put to
the end of the task list.

sched_rt_period_us
Period over which real-time task bandwidth enforcement is measured. The default value
is 1000000 (µs).

sched_rt_runtime_us
Quantum allocated to real-time tasks during sched_rt_period_us. Setting to -1 disables RT
bandwidth enforcement. By default, RT tasks may consume 95%CPU/sec, thus leaving
5%CPU/sec or 0.05s to be used by SCHED_OTHER tasks. The default value is 950000 (µs).

sched_nr_migrate
Controls how many tasks can be migrated across processors for load-balancing purposes.
Because balancing iterates the runqueue with interrupts disabled (softirq), it can incur
in irq-latency penalties for real-time tasks. Therefore increasing this value may give a
performance boost to large SCHED_OTHER threads at the expense of increased irq-latencies
for real-time tasks. The default value is 32 .

sched_time_avg_ms
This parameter sets the period over which the time spent running real-time tasks is aver-
aged. That average assists CFS in making load-balancing decisions and gives an indication
of how busy a CPU is with high-priority real-time tasks.
The optimal setting for this parameter is highly workload dependent and depends, among
other things, on how frequently real-time tasks are running and for how long.

141 Runtime Tuning with sysctl SLED 12 SP3

13.3.7 Debugging Interface and Scheduler Statistics
CFS comes with a new improved debugging interface, and provides runtime statistics informa-
tion. Relevant les were added to the /proc le system, which can be examined simply with
the cat or less command. A list of the related /proc les follows with their short description:

/proc/sched_debug
Contains the current values of all tunable variables (see Section 13.3.6, “Runtime Tuning with
sysctl”) that affect the task scheduler behavior, CFS statistics, and information about the
run queues (CFS, RT and deadline) on all available processors. A summary of the task
running on each processor is also shown, with the task name and PID, along with scheduler
specific statistics. The rst being tree-key column, it indicates the task's virtual runtime,
and its name comes from the kernel sorting all runnable tasks by this key in a red-black
tree. The switches column indicates the total number of switches (involuntary or not),
and naturally the prio refers to the process priority. The wait-time value indicates
the amount of time the task waited to be scheduled. Finally both sum-exec and sum-
sleep account for the total amount of time (in nanoseconds) the task was running on the
processor or asleep, respectively.

root # cat /proc/sched_debug

Sched Debug Version: v0.11, 4.4.21-64-default #1
ktime : 23533900.395978
sched_clk : 23543587.726648
cpu_clk : 23533900.396165
jiffies : 4300775771
sched_clock_stable : 0

sysctl_sched
.sysctl_sched_latency : 6.000000
.sysctl_sched_min_granularity : 2.000000
.sysctl_sched_wakeup_granularity : 2.500000
.sysctl_sched_child_runs_first : 0
.sysctl_sched_features : 154871
.sysctl_sched_tunable_scaling : 1 (logaritmic)

cpu#0, 2666.762 MHz

.nr_running : 1
.load : 1024
.nr_switches : 1918946
[...]

cfs_rq[0]:/
.exec_clock : 170176.383770

142 Debugging Interface and Scheduler Statistics SLED 12 SP3

 .MIN_vruntime : 0.000001
.min_vruntime : 347375.854324
.max_vruntime : 0.000001
[...]

rt_rq[0]:/
.rt_nr_running : 0
.rt_throttled : 0
.rt_time : 0.000000
.rt_runtime : 950.000000

dl_rq[0]:
.dl_nr_running : 0

task PID tree-key switches prio wait-time [...]

------------------------------------------------------------------------
R cc1 63477 98876.717832 197 120 0.000000 ...

/proc/schedstat
Displays statistics relevant to the current run queue. Also domain-specific statistics for
SMP systems are displayed for all connected processors. Because the output format is not
user-friendly, read the contents of /usr/src/linux/Documentation/scheduler/sched-
stats.txt for more information.

/proc/PID/sched
Displays scheduling information on the process with id PID .

root # cat /proc/$(pidof gdm)/sched

gdm (744, #threads: 3)
-------------------------------------------------------------------
se.exec_start : 8888.758381
se.vruntime : 6062.853815
se.sum_exec_runtime : 7.836043
se.statistics.wait_start : 0.000000
se.statistics.sleep_start : 8888.758381
se.statistics.block_start : 0.000000
se.statistics.sleep_max : 1965.987638
[...]
se.avg.decay_count : 8477
policy : 0
prio : 120
clock-delta : 128
mm->numa_scan_seq : 0
numa_migrations, 0
numa_faults_memory, 0, 0, 1, 0, -1

143 Debugging Interface and Scheduler Statistics SLED 12 SP3

 numa_faults_memory, 1, 0, 0, 0, -1

13.4 For More Information

To get a compact knowledge about Linux kernel task scheduling, you need to explore several
information sources. Here are some:

For task scheduler System Calls description, see the relevant manual page (for example
man 2 sched_setaffinity ).

General information on scheduling is described in Scheduling (http://en.wikipedia.org/wi-

ki/Scheduling_(computing)) wiki page.

A useful lecture on Linux scheduler policy and algorithm is available in http://www.in-

f.fu-berlin.de/lehre/SS01/OS/Lectures/Lecture08.pdf .

A good overview of Linux process scheduling is given in Linux Kernel Development

by Robert Love (ISBN-10: 0-672-32512-8). See http://www.informit.com/articles/article.as-
px?p=101760 .

A very comprehensive overview of the Linux kernel internals is given in Understanding the
Linux Kernel by Daniel P. Bovet and Marco Cesati (ISBN 978-0-596-00565-8).

Technical information about task scheduler is covered in les under /usr/src/lin-

ux/Documentation/scheduler .

144 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

14 Tuning the Memory Management Subsystem

To understand and tune the memory management behavior of the kernel, it is important to rst
have an overview of how it works and cooperates with other subsystems.
The memory management subsystem, also called the virtual memory manager, will subsequently
be called “VM”. The role of the VM is to manage the allocation of physical memory (RAM)
for the entire kernel and user programs. It is also responsible for providing a virtual memory
environment for user processes (managed via POSIX APIs with Linux extensions). Finally, the
VM is responsible for freeing up RAM when there is a shortage, either by trimming caches or
swapping out “anonymous” memory.
The most important thing to understand when examining and tuning VM is how its caches
are managed. The basic goal of the VM's caches is to minimize the cost of I/O as generated
by swapping and le system operations (including network le systems). This is achieved by
avoiding I/O completely, or by submitting I/O in better patterns.
Free memory will be used and lled up by these caches as required. The more memory is avail-
able for caches and anonymous memory, the more effectively caches and swapping will oper-
ate. However, if a memory shortage is encountered, caches will be trimmed or memory will
be swapped out.
For a particular workload, the rst thing that can be done to improve performance is to increase
memory and reduce the frequency that memory must be trimmed or swapped. The second thing
is to change the way caches are managed by changing kernel parameters.
Finally, the workload itself should be examined and tuned as well. If an application is allowed
to run more processes or threads, effectiveness of VM caches can be reduced, if each process is
operating in its own area of the le system. Memory overheads are also increased. If applications
allocate their own buers or caches, larger caches will mean that less memory is available for
VM caches. However, more processes and threads can mean more opportunity to overlap and
pipeline I/O, and may take better advantage of multiple cores. Experimentation will be required
for the best results.

14.1 Memory Usage

Memory allocations in general can be characterized as “pinned” (also known as “unre-
claimable”), “reclaimable” or “swappable”.

145 Memory Usage SLED 12 SP3

14.1.1 Anonymous Memory
Anonymous memory tends to be program heap and stack memory (for example, >malloc() ).
It is reclaimable, except in special cases such as mlock or if there is no available swap space.
Anonymous memory must be written to swap before it can be reclaimed. Swap I/O (both swap-
ping in and swapping out pages) tends to be less efficient than pagecache I/O, because of allo-
cation and access patterns.

14.1.2 Pagecache
A cache of le data. When a le is read from disk or network, the contents are stored in page-
cache. No disk or network access is required, if the contents are up-to-date in pagecache. tmpfs
and shared memory segments count toward pagecache.
When a le is written to, the new data is stored in pagecache before being written back to a
disk or the network (making it a write-back cache). When a page has new data not written back
yet, it is called “dirty”. Pages not classified as dirty are “clean”. Clean pagecache pages can be
reclaimed if there is a memory shortage by simply freeing them. Dirty pages must rst be made
clean before being reclaimed.

14.1.3 Buffercache
This is a type of pagecache for block devices (for example, /dev/sda). A le system typically uses
the buffercache when accessing its on-disk metadata structures such as inode tables, allocation
bitmaps, and so forth. Buffercache can be reclaimed similarly to pagecache.

14.1.4 Buffer Heads

Buer heads are small auxiliary structures that tend to be allocated upon pagecache access. They
can generally be reclaimed easily when the pagecache or buffercache pages are clean.

14.1.5 Writeback
As applications write to les, the pagecache becomes dirty and the buffercache may be-
come dirty. When the amount of dirty memory reaches a specified number of pages in bytes
(vm.dirty_background_bytes), or when the amount of dirty memory reaches a specific ratio to total

146 Anonymous Memory SLED 12 SP3

memory (vm.dirty_background_ratio), or when the pages have been dirty for longer than a speci-
fied amount of time (vm.dirty_expire_centisecs), the kernel begins writeback of pages starting with
les that had the pages dirtied rst. The background bytes and ratios are mutually exclusive
and setting one will overwrite the other. Flusher threads perform writeback in the background
and allow applications to continue running. If the I/O cannot keep up with applications dirtying
pagecache, and dirty data reaches a critical setting (vm.dirty_bytes or vm.dirty_ratio), then appli-
cations begin to be throttled to prevent dirty data exceeding this threshold.

14.1.6 Readahead
The VM monitors le access patterns and may attempt to perform readahead. Readahead reads
pages into the pagecache from the le system that have not been requested yet. It is done to
allow fewer, larger I/O requests to be submitted (more efficient). And for I/O to be pipelined
(I/O performed at the same time as the application is running).

14.1.7 VFS caches

14.1.7.1 Inode Cache

This is an in-memory cache of the inode structures for each le system. These contain attributes
such as the le size, permissions and ownership, and pointers to the le data.

14.1.7.2 Directory Entry Cache

This is an in-memory cache of the directory entries in the system. These contain a name (the
name of a le), the inode which it refers to, and children entries. This cache is used when
traversing the directory structure and accessing a le by name.

147 Readahead SLED 12 SP3

14.2 Reducing Memory Usage

14.2.1 Reducing malloc (Anonymous) Usage

Applications running on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP3 can allocate more memory com-
pared to SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10. This is because of glibc changing its default behav-
ior while allocating user space memory. See http://www.gnu.org/s/libc/manual/html_node/Mal-
loc-Tunable-Parameters.html for explanation of these parameters.
To restore a SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10-like behavior, M_MMAP_THRESHOLD should
be set to 128*1024. This can be done with mallopt() call from the application, or via setting
MALLOC_MMAP_THRESHOLD environment variable before running the application.

14.2.2 Reducing Kernel Memory Overheads

Kernel memory that is reclaimable (caches, described above) will be trimmed automatically
during memory shortages. Most other kernel memory cannot be easily reduced but is a property
of the workload given to the kernel.
Reducing the requirements of the user space workload will reduce the kernel memory usage
(fewer processes, fewer open les and sockets, etc.)

14.2.3 Memory Controller (Memory Cgroups)

If the memory cgroups feature is not needed, it can be switched o by passing cgroup_dis-
able=memory on the kernel command line, reducing memory consumption of the kernel a bit.
There is also a slight performance benefit as there is a small amount of accounting overhead
when memory cgroups are available even if none are configured.

148 Reducing Memory Usage SLED 12 SP3

14.3 Virtual Memory Manager (VM) Tunable
Parameters
When tuning the VM it should be understood that some changes will take time to affect the
workload and take full effect. If the workload changes throughout the day, it may behave very
differently at different times. A change that increases throughput under some conditions may
decrease it under other conditions.

14.3.1 Reclaim Ratios

/proc/sys/vm/swappiness
This control is used to define how aggressively the kernel swaps out anonymous memo-
ry relative to pagecache and other caches. Increasing the value increases the amount of
swapping. The default value is 60 .
Swap I/O tends to be much less efficient than other I/O. However, some pagecache pages
will be accessed much more frequently than less used anonymous memory. The right bal-
ance should be found here.
If swap activity is observed during slowdowns, it may be worth reducing this parameter.
If there is a lot of I/O activity and the amount of pagecache in the system is rather small,
or if there are large dormant applications running, increasing this value might improve
performance.
Note that the more data is swapped out, the longer the system will take to swap data back
in when it is needed.

/proc/sys/vm/vfs_cache_pressure
This variable controls the tendency of the kernel to reclaim the memory which is used for
caching of VFS caches, versus pagecache and swap. Increasing this value increases the rate
at which VFS caches are reclaimed.
It is difficult to know when this should be changed, other than by experimentation. The
slabtop command (part of the package procps ) shows top memory objects used by
the kernel. The vfs caches are the "dentry" and the "*_inode_cache" objects. If these are
consuming a large amount of memory in relation to pagecache, it may be worth trying to
increase pressure. Could also help to reduce swapping. The default value is 100 .

149 Virtual Memory Manager (VM) Tunable Parameters SLED 12 SP3

/proc/sys/vm/min_free_kbytes
This controls the amount of memory that is kept free for use by special reserves including
“atomic” allocations (those which cannot wait for reclaim). This should not normally be
lowered unless the system is being very carefully tuned for memory usage (normally useful
for embedded rather than server applications). If “page allocation failure” messages and
stack traces are frequently seen in logs, min_free_kbytes could be increased until the errors
disappear. There is no need for concern, if these messages are very infrequent. The default
value depends on the amount of RAM.

/proc/sys/vm/watermark_scale_factor
Broadly speaking, free memory has high, low and min watermarks. When the low water-
mark is reached then kswapd wakes to reclaim memory in the background. It stays awake
until free memory reaches the high watermark. Applications will stall and reclaim memory
when the low watermark is reached.
The watermark_scale_factor defines the amount of memory left in a node/system be-
fore kswapd is woken up and how much memory needs to be free before kswapd goes back
to sleep. The unit is in fractions of 10,000. The default value of 10 means the distances
between watermarks are 0.1% of the available memory in the node/system. The maximum
value is 1000, or 10% of memory.
Workloads that frequently stall in direct reclaim, accounted by allocstall in /proc/
vmstat , may benefit from altering this parameter. Similarly, if kswapd is sleeping prema-
turely, as accounted for by kswapd_low_wmark_hit_quickly , then it may indicate that
the number of pages kept free to avoid stalls is too low.

14.3.2 Writeback Parameters

One important change in writeback behavior since SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 is that
modification to le-backed mmap() memory is accounted immediately as dirty memory (and
subject to writeback). Whereas previously it would only be subject to writeback after it was
unmapped, upon an msync() system call, or under heavy memory pressure.
Some applications do not expect mmap modifications to be subject to such writeback behavior,
and performance can be reduced. Berkeley DB (and applications using it) is one known exam-
ple that can cause problems. Increasing writeback ratios and times can improve this type of
slowdown.

150 Writeback Parameters SLED 12 SP3

/proc/sys/vm/dirty_background_ratio
This is the percentage of the total amount of free and reclaimable memory. When the
amount of dirty pagecache exceeds this percentage, writeback threads start writing back
dirty memory. The default value is 10 (%).

/proc/sys/vm/dirty_background_bytes
This contains the amount of dirty memory at which the background kernel flusher threads
will start writeback. dirty_background_bytes is the counterpart of dirty_back-
ground_ratio . If one of them is set, the other one will automatically be read as 0 .

/proc/sys/vm/dirty_ratio
Similar percentage value as for dirty_background_ratio . When this is exceeded, appli-
cations that want to write to the pagecache are blocked and wait for kernel background
flusher threads to reduce the amount of dirty memory. The default value is 20 (%).

/proc/sys/vm/dirty_bytes
This le controls the same tunable as dirty_ratio however the amount of dirty memory
is in bytes as opposed to a percentage of reclaimable memory. Since both dirty_ratio
and dirty_bytes control the same tunable, if one of them is set, the other one will auto-
matically be read as 0 . The minimum value allowed for dirty_bytes is two pages (in
bytes); any value lower than this limit will be ignored and the old configuration will be
retained.

/proc/sys/vm/dirty_expire_centisecs
Data which has been dirty in-memory for longer than this interval will be written out next
time a flusher thread wakes up. Expiration is measured based on the modification time
of a le's inode. Therefore, multiple dirtied pages from the same le will all be written
when the interval is exceeded.

dirty_background_ratio and dirty_ratio together determine the pagecache writeback be-

havior. If these values are increased, more dirty memory is kept in the system for a longer
time. With more dirty memory allowed in the system, the chance to improve throughput by
avoiding writeback I/O and to submitting more optimal I/O patterns increases. However, more
dirty memory can either harm latency when memory needs to be reclaimed or at points of data
integrity (“synchronization points”) when it needs to be written back to disk.

151 Writeback Parameters SLED 12 SP3

14.3.3 Timing Differences of I/O Writes between SUSE Linux
Enterprise 12 and SUSE Linux Enterprise 11
The system is required to limit what percentage of the system's memory contains le-backed
data that needs writing to disk. This guarantees that the system can always allocate the neces-
sary data structures to complete I/O. The maximum amount of memory that can be dirty and
requires writing at any time is controlled by vm.dirty_ratio ( /proc/sys/vm/dirty_ratio ).
The defaults are:

SLE-11-SP3: vm.dirty_ratio = 40
SLE-12: vm.dirty_ratio = 20

The primary advantage of using the lower ratio in SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 is that page recla-
mation and allocation in low memory situations completes faster as there is a higher probability
that old clean pages will be quickly found and discarded. The secondary advantage is that if
all data on the system must be synchronized, then the time to complete the operation on SUSE
Linux Enterprise 12 will be lower than SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 SP3 by default. Most workloads
will not notice this change as data is synchronized with fsync() by the application or data is
not dirtied quickly enough to hit the limits.
There are exceptions and if your application is affected by this, it will manifest as an unex-
pected stall during writes. To prove it is affected by dirty data rate limiting then monitor /
proc/PID_OF_APPLICATION/stack and it will be observed that the application spends signifi-
cant time in balance_dirty_pages_ratelimited . If this is observed and it is a problem, then
increase the value of vm.dirty_ratio to 40 to restore the SUSE Linux Enterprise 11 SP3 be-
havior.
It is important to note that the overall I/O throughput is the same regardless of the setting. The
only difference is the timing of when the I/O is queued.
This is an example of using dd to asynchronously write 30% of memory to disk which would
happen to be affected by the change in vm.dirty_ratio :

root # MEMTOTAL_MBYTES=`free -m | grep Mem: | awk '{print $2}'`

root # sysctl vm.dirty_ratio=40
root # dd if=/dev/zero of=zerofile ibs=1048576 count=$((MEMTOTAL_MBYTES*30/100))
2507145216 bytes (2.5 GB) copied, 8.00153 s, 313 MB/s
root # sysctl vm.dirty_ratio=20
dd if=/dev/zero of=zerofile ibs=1048576 count=$((MEMTOTAL_MBYTES*30/100))
2507145216 bytes (2.5 GB) copied, 10.1593 s, 247 MB/s

Timing Differences of I/O Writes between SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 and SUSE Linux Enterprise

152 11 SLED 12 SP3

Note that the parameter affects the time it takes for the command to complete and the apparent
write speed of the device. With dirty_ratio=40 , more of the data is cached and written to disk
in the background by the kernel. It is very important to note that the speed of I/O is identical
in both cases. To demonstrate, this is the result when dd synchronizes the data before exiting:

root # sysctl vm.dirty_ratio=40

root # dd if=/dev/zero of=zerofile ibs=1048576 count=$((MEMTOTAL_MBYTES*30/100))
conv=fdatasync
2507145216 bytes (2.5 GB) copied, 21.0663 s, 119 MB/s
root # sysctl vm.dirty_ratio=20
root # dd if=/dev/zero of=zerofile ibs=1048576 count=$((MEMTOTAL_MBYTES*30/100))
conv=fdatasync
2507145216 bytes (2.5 GB) copied, 21.7286 s, 115 MB/s

Note that dirty_ratio had almost no impact here and is within the natural variability of a
command. Hence, dirty_ratio does not directly impact I/O performance but it may affect the
apparent performance of a workload that writes data asynchronously without synchronizing.

14.3.4 Readahead Parameters

/sys/block/<bdev>/queue/read_ahead_kb
If one or more processes are sequentially reading a le, the kernel reads some data in
advance (ahead) to reduce the amount of time that processes need to wait for data to be
available. The actual amount of data being read in advance is computed dynamically, based
on how much "sequential" the I/O seems to be. This parameter sets the maximum amount
of data that the kernel reads ahead for a single le. If you observe that large sequential
reads from a le are not fast enough, you can try increasing this value. Increasing it too
far may result in readahead thrashing where pagecache used for readahead is reclaimed
before it can be used, or slowdowns because of a large amount of useless I/O. The default
value is 512 (KB).

14.3.5 Transparent Huge Page Parameters

Transparent Huge Pages (THP) provide a way to dynamically allocate huge pages either on‑de-
mand by the process or deferring the allocation until later via the khugepaged kernel thread.
This method is distinct from the use of hugetlbfs to manually manage their allocation and

153 Readahead Parameters SLED 12 SP3

use. Workloads with contiguous memory access patterns can benefit greatly from THP. A 1000-
fold decrease in page faults can be observed when running synthetic workloads with contiguous
memory access patterns.
There are cases when THP may be undesirable. Workloads with sparse memory access patterns
can perform poorly with THP due to excessive memory usage. For example, 2 MB of memory may
be used at fault time instead of 4 KB for each fault and ultimately lead to premature page reclaim.
On releases older than SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 SP2, it was possible for an application to stall
for long periods of time trying to allocate a THP which frequently led to a recommendation of
disabling THP. Such recommendations should be re-evaluated for SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 SP3
The behavior of THP may be configured via the transparent_hugepage= kernel parameter
or via sysfs. For example, it may be disabled by adding the kernel parameter transparen-
t_hugepage=never , rebuilding your grub2 configuration, and rebooting. Verify if THP is dis-
abled with:

root # cat /sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/enabled

always madvise [never]

If disabled, the value never is shown in square brackets like in the example above. A value of
always will always try and use THP at fault time but defer to khugepaged if the allocation
fails. A value of madvise will only allocate THP for address spaces explicitly specified by an
application.

/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/defrag
This parameter controls how much effort an application commits when allocating a THP.
A value of always is the default for SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 SP1 and earlier releases that
supported THP. If a THP is not available, the application will try to defragment memory.
It potentially incurs large stalls in an application if the memory is fragmented and a THP
is not available.
A value of madvise means that THP allocation requests will only defragment if the ap-
plication explicitly requests it. This is the default for SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 SP2 and
later releases.
defer is only available on SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 SP2 and later releases. If a THP is
not available, the application will fall back to using small pages if a THP is not available.
It will wake the kswapd and kcompactd kernel threads to defragment memory in the
background and a THP will be allocated later by khugepaged .
The final option never will use small pages if a THP is unavailable but no other action
will take place.

154 Transparent Huge Page Parameters SLED 12 SP3

14.3.6 khugepaged Parameters
khugepaged will be automatically started when transparent_hugepage is set to always or
madvise , and it will be automatically shut down if it is set to never . Normally this runs at low
frequency but the behavior can be tuned.

/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/defrag
A value of 0 will disable khugepaged even though THP may still be used at fault time.
This may be important for latency-sensitive applications that benefit from THP but cannot
tolerate a stall if khugepaged tries to update an application memory usage.

/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/pages_to_scan
This parameter controls how many pages are scanned by khugepaged in a single pass.
A scan identifies small pages that can be reallocated as THP. Increasing this value will
allocate THP in the background faster at the cost of CPU usage.

/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/scan_sleep_millisecs
khugepaged sleeps for a short interval specified by this parameter after each pass to limit
how much CPU usage is used. Reducing this value will allocate THP in the background
faster at the cost of CPU usage. A value of 0 will force continual scanning.

/sys/kernel/mm/transparent_hugepage/khugepaged/alloc_sleep_millisecs
This parameter controls how long khugepaged will sleep in the event it fails to allocate a
THP in the background waiting for kswapd and kcompactd to take action.

The remaining parameters for khugepaged are rarely useful for performance tuning but are
fully documented in /usr/src/linux/Documentation/vm/transhuge.txt

14.3.7 Further VM Parameters

For the complete list of the VM tunable parameters, see /usr/src/linux/Documenta-
tion/sysctl/vm.txt (available after having installed the kernel-source package).

155 khugepaged Parameters SLED 12 SP3

14.4 Monitoring VM Behavior
Some simple tools that can help monitor VM behavior:

1. vmstat: This tool gives a good overview of what the VM is doing. See Section 2.1.1, “vmstat”
for details.

2. /proc/meminfo : This le gives a detailed breakdown of where memory is being used. See
Section 2.4.2, “Detailed Memory Usage: /proc/meminfo” for details.

3. slabtop : This tool provides detailed information about kernel slab memory usage.
buer_head, dentry, inode_cache, ext3_inode_cache, etc. are the major caches. This com-
mand is available with the package procps .

4. /proc/vmstat : This le gives a detailed breakdown of internal VM behaviour. The in-
formation contained within is implementation specific and may not always be available.
Some information is duplicated in /proc/meminfo and other can be presented in a friend-
ly fashion by utilities. For maximum utility, this le needs to be monitored over time to
observe rates of change. The most important pieces of information that are hard to derive
from other sources are as follows:

pgscan_kswapd_*, pgsteal_kswapd_*
These report respectively the number of pages scanned and reclaimed by kswapd
since the system started. The ratio between these values can be interpreted as the
reclaim efficiency with a low efficiency implying that the system is struggling to
reclaim memory and may be thrashing. Light activity here is generally not something
to be concerned with.

pgscan_direct_*, pgsteal_direct_*
These report respectively the number of pages scanned and reclaimed by an applica-
tion directly. This is correlated with increases in the allocstall counter. This is
more serious than kswapd activity as these events indicate that processes are stalling.
Heavy activity here combined with kswapd and high rates of pgpgin , pgpout and/
or high rates of pswapin or pswpout are signs that a system is thrashing heavily.
More detailed information can be obtained using tracepoints.

156 Monitoring VM Behavior SLED 12 SP3

 thp_fault_alloc, thp_fault_fallback
These counters correspond to how many THPs were allocated directly by an appli-
cation and how many times a THP was not available and small pages were used.
Generally a high fallback rate is harmless unless the application is very sensitive to
TLB pressure.

thp_collapse_alloc, thp_collapse_alloc_failed
These counters correspond to how many THPs were allocated by khugepaged and
how many times a THP was not available and small pages were used. A high fallback
rate implies that the system is fragmented and THPs are not being used even when the
memory usage by applications would allow them. It is only a problem for applications
that are sensitive to TLB pressure.

compact_*_scanned, compact_stall, compact_fail, compact_success

These counters may increase when THP is enabled and the system is fragmented.
compact_stall is incremented when an application stalls allocating THP. The re-
maining counters account for pages scanned, the number of defragmentation events
that succeeded or failed.

157 Monitoring VM Behavior SLED 12 SP3

15 Tuning the Network
The network subsystem is complex and its tuning highly depends on the system use scenario
and on external factors such as software clients or hardware components (switches, routers, or
gateways) in your network. The Linux kernel aims more at reliability and low latency than low
overhead and high throughput. Other settings can mean less security, but better performance.

15.1 Configurable Kernel Socket Buffers

Networking is largely based on the TCP/IP protocol and a socket interface for communication;
for more information about TCP/IP, see Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 17 “Basic Networking”.
The Linux kernel handles data it receives or sends via the socket interface in socket buers.
These kernel socket buers are tunable.

Important: TCP Autotuning

Since kernel version 2.6.17 full autotuning with 4 MB maximum buer size exists. This
means that manual tuning usually will not improve networking performance consider-
ably. It is often the best not to touch the following variables, or, at least, to check the
outcome of tuning efforts carefully.
If you update from an older kernel, it is recommended to remove manual TCP tunings
in favor of the autotuning feature.

The special les in the /proc le system can modify the size and behavior of kernel socket
buers; for general information about the /proc le system, see Section  2.6, “The /proc File
System”. Find networking related les in:

/proc/sys/net/core
/proc/sys/net/ipv4
/proc/sys/net/ipv6

General net variables are explained in the kernel documentation ( linux/Documenta-

tion/sysctl/net.txt ). Special ipv4 variables are explained in linux/Documentation/net-
working/ip-sysctl.txt and linux/Documentation/networking/ipvs-sysctl.txt .

In the /proc le system, for example, it is possible to either set the Maximum Socket Receive
Buer and Maximum Socket Send Buer for all protocols, or both these options for the TCP
protocol only (in ipv4 ) and thus overriding the setting for all protocols (in core ).

158 Configurable Kernel Socket Buffers SLED 12 SP3

/proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_moderate_rcvbuf
If /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_moderate_rcvbuf is set to 1 , autotuning is active and
buer size is adjusted dynamically.

/proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_rmem
The three values setting the minimum, initial, and maximum size of the Memory Receive
Buer per connection. They define the actual memory usage, not only TCP window size.

/proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_wmem
The same as tcp_rmem , but for Memory Send Buer per connection.

/proc/sys/net/core/rmem_max
Set to limit the maximum receive buer size that applications can request.

/proc/sys/net/core/wmem_max
Set to limit the maximum send buer size that applications can request.

Via /proc it is possible to disable TCP features that you do not need (all TCP features are
switched on by default). For example, check the following les:

/proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_timestamps
TCP time stamps are defined in RFC1323.

/proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_window_scaling
TCP window scaling is also defined in RFC1323.

/proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_sack
Select acknowledgments (SACKS).

Use sysctl to read or write variables of the /proc le system. sysctl is preferable to cat
(for reading) and echo (for writing), because it also reads settings from /etc/sysctl.conf
and, thus, those settings survive reboots reliably. With sysctl you can read all variables and
their values easily; as root use the following command to list TCP related settings:

sysctl -a | grep tcp

Note: Side-Effects of Tuning Network Variables

Tuning network variables can affect other system resources such as CPU or memory use.

159 Configurable Kernel Socket Buffers SLED 12 SP3

15.2 Detecting Network Bottlenecks and Analyzing
Network Traffic
Before starting with network tuning, it is important to isolate network bottlenecks and network
traffic patterns. There are some tools that can help you with detecting those bottlenecks.
The following tools can help analyzing your network traffic: netstat , tcpdump , and wire-
shark . Wireshark is a network traffic analyzer.

15.3 Netfilter
The Linux firewall and masquerading features are provided by the Netfilter kernel modules. This
is a highly configurable rule based framework. If a rule matches a packet, Netfilter accepts or
denies it or takes special action (“target”) as defined by rules such as address translation.
There are quite a lot of properties Netfilter can take into account. Thus, the more rules are
defined, the longer packet processing may last. Also advanced connection tracking could be
rather expensive and, thus, slowing down overall networking.
When the kernel queue becomes full, all new packets are dropped, causing existing connec-
tions to fail. The 'fail-open' feature allows a user to temporarily disable the packet inspection
and maintain the connectivity under heavy network traffic. For reference, see https://home.re-
git.org/netfilter-en/using-nfqueue-and-libnetfilter_queue/ .
For more information, see the home page of the Netfilter and iptables project, http://www.net-
filter.org

15.4 Improving the Network Performance with

Receive Packet Steering (RPS)
Modern network interface devices can move so many packets that the host can become the
limiting factor for achieving maximum performance. To keep up, the system must be able to
distribute the work across multiple CPU cores.
Some modern network interfaces can help distribute the work to multiple CPU cores through the
implementation of multiple transmission and multiple receive queues in hardware. However,
others are only equipped with a single queue and the driver must deal with all incoming packets

160 Detecting Network Bottlenecks and Analyzing Network Traffic SLED 12 SP3
in a single, serialized stream. To work around this issue, the operating system must "parallelize"
the stream to distribute the work across multiple CPUs. On SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop this
is done via Receive Packet Steering (RPS). RPS can also be used in virtual environments.
RPS creates a unique hash for each data stream using IP addresses and port numbers. The use of
this hash ensures that packets for the same data stream are sent to the same CPU, which helps
to increase performance.
RPS is configured per network device receive queue and interface. The configuration le names
match the following scheme:

/sys/class/net/<device>/queues/<rx-queue>/rps_cpus

<device> stands for the network device, such as eth0 , eth1 . <rx-queue> stands for the
receive queue, such as rx-0 , rx-1 .
If the network interface hardware only supports a single receive queue, only rx-0 will exist. If
it supports multiple receive queues, there will be an rx- N directory for each receive queue.
These configuration les contain a comma-delimited list of CPU bitmaps. By default, all bits are
set to 0 . With this setting RPS is disabled and therefore the CPU that handles the interrupt will
also process the packet queue.
To enable RPS and enable specific CPUs to process packets for the receive queue of the interface,
set the value of their positions in the bitmap to 1 . For example, to enable CPUs 0-3 to process
packets for the rst receive queue for eth0, set the bit positions 0-3 to 1 in binary: 00001111 .
This representation then needs to be converted to hex—which results in F in this case. Set this
hex value with the following command:

echo "f" > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/rx-0/rps_cpus

If you wanted to enable CPUs 8-15:

1111 1111 0000 0000 (binary)

15 15 0 0 (decimal)
F F 0 0 (hex)

The command to set the hex value of ff00 would be:

echo "ff00" > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/rx-0/rps_cpus

On NUMA machines, best performance can be achieved by configuring RPS to use the CPUs on
the same NUMA node as the interrupt for the interface's receive queue.

161 Improving the Network Performance with Receive Packet Steering (RPS) SLED 12 SP3
On non-NUMA machines, all CPUs can be used. If the interrupt rate is very high, excluding the
CPU handling the network interface can boost performance. The CPU being used for the network
interface can be determined from /proc/interrupts . For example:

root # cat /proc/interrupts

CPU0 CPU1 CPU2 CPU3
...
51: 113915241 0 0 0 Phys-fasteoi eth0
...

In this case, CPU 0 is the only CPU processing interrupts for eth0 , since only CPU0 contains
a non-zero value.
On x86 and AMD64/Intel 64 platforms, irqbalance can be used to distribute hardware inter-
rupts across CPUs. See man 1 irqbalance for more details.

15.5 For More Information

Eduardo Ciliendo, Takechika Kunimasa: “Linux Performance and Tuning Guidelines”
(2007), esp. sections 1.5, 3.5, and 4.7: http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/redpapers/ab-
stracts/redp4285.html

John Heffner, Matt Mathis: “Tuning TCP for Linux 2.4 and 2.6” (2006): http://www.psc.e-
du/networking/projects/tcptune/#Linux

162 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

VI Handling System Dumps

16 Tracing Tools 164

17 Kexec and Kdump 175

16 Tracing Tools

SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop comes with several tools that help you obtain useful information
about your system. You can use the information for various purposes, for example, to debug
and nd problems in your program, to discover places causing performance drops, or to trace
a running process to nd out what system resources it uses. Most of the tools are part of the
installation media. In some cases, they need to be installed from the SUSE Software Development
Kit, which is a separate download.

Note: Tracing and Impact on Performance

While a running process is being monitored for system or library calls, the performance
of the process is heavily reduced. You are advised to use tracing tools only for the time
you need to collect the data.

16.1 Tracing System Calls with strace

The strace command traces system calls of a process and signals received by the process.
strace can either run a new command and trace its system calls, or you can attach strace
to an already running command. Each line of the command's output contains the system call
name, followed by its arguments in parentheses and its return value.
To run a new command and start tracing its system calls, enter the command to be monitored
as you normally do, and add strace at the beginning of the command line:

tux > strace ls

execve("/bin/ls", ["ls"], [/* 52 vars */]) = 0
brk(0) = 0x618000
mmap(NULL, 4096, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_PRIVATE|MAP_ANONYMOUS, -1, 0) \
= 0x7f9848667000
mmap(NULL, 4096, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_PRIVATE|MAP_ANONYMOUS, -1, 0) \
= 0x7f9848666000
access("/etc/ld.so.preload", R_OK) = -1 ENOENT \
(No such file or directory)
open("/etc/ld.so.cache", O_RDONLY) = 3
fstat(3, {st_mode=S_IFREG|0644, st_size=200411, ...}) = 0
mmap(NULL, 200411, PROT_READ, MAP_PRIVATE, 3, 0) = 0x7f9848635000
close(3) = 0
open("/lib64/librt.so.1", O_RDONLY) = 3

164 Tracing System Calls with strace SLED 12 SP3

[...]
mmap(NULL, 4096, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_PRIVATE|MAP_ANONYMOUS, -1, 0) \
= 0x7fd780f79000
write(1, "Desktop\nDocuments\nbin\ninst-sys\n", 31Desktop
Documents
bin
inst-sys
) = 31
close(1) = 0
munmap(0x7fd780f79000, 4096) = 0
close(2) = 0
exit_group(0) = ?

To attach strace to an already running process, you need to specify the -p with the process
ID ( PID ) of the process that you want to monitor:

tux > strace -p `pidof cron`

Process 1261 attached
restart_syscall(<... resuming interrupted call ...>) = 0
stat("/etc/localtime", {st_mode=S_IFREG|0644, st_size=2309, ...}) = 0
select(5, [4], NULL, NULL, {0, 0}) = 0 (Timeout)
socket(PF_LOCAL, SOCK_STREAM|SOCK_CLOEXEC|SOCK_NONBLOCK, 0) = 5
connect(5, {sa_family=AF_LOCAL, sun_path="/var/run/nscd/socket"}, 110) = 0
sendto(5, "\2\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\5\0\0\0root\0", 17, MSG_NOSIGNAL, NULL, 0) = 17
poll([{fd=5, events=POLLIN|POLLERR|POLLHUP}], 1, 5000) = 1 ([{fd=5, revents=POLLIN|
POLLHUP}])
read(5, "\2\0\0\0\1\0\0\0\5\0\0\0\2\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\5\0\0\0\6\0\0\0"..., 36) = 36
read(5, "root\0x\0root\0/root\0/bin/bash\0", 28) = 28
close(5) = 0
rt_sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, [CHLD], [], 8) = 0
rt_sigaction(SIGCHLD, NULL, {0x7f772b9ea890, [], SA_RESTORER|SA_RESTART,
0x7f772adf7880}, 8) = 0
rt_sigprocmask(SIG_SETMASK, [], NULL, 8) = 0
nanosleep({60, 0}, 0x7fff87d8c580) = 0
stat("/etc/localtime", {st_mode=S_IFREG|0644, st_size=2309, ...}) = 0
select(5, [4], NULL, NULL, {0, 0}) = 0 (Timeout)
socket(PF_LOCAL, SOCK_STREAM|SOCK_CLOEXEC|SOCK_NONBLOCK, 0) = 5
connect(5, {sa_family=AF_LOCAL, sun_path="/var/run/nscd/socket"}, 110) = 0
sendto(5, "\2\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\5\0\0\0root\0", 17, MSG_NOSIGNAL, NULL, 0) = 17
poll([{fd=5, events=POLLIN|POLLERR|POLLHUP}], 1, 5000) = 1 ([{fd=5, revents=POLLIN|
POLLHUP}])
read(5, "\2\0\0\0\1\0\0\0\5\0\0\0\2\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\5\0\0\0\6\0\0\0"..., 36) = 36
read(5, "root\0x\0root\0/root\0/bin/bash\0", 28) = 28
close(5)
[...]

165 Tracing System Calls with strace SLED 12 SP3

The -e option understands several sub-options and arguments. For example, to trace all at-
tempts to open or write to a particular le, use the following:

tux > strace -e trace=open,write ls ~

open("/etc/ld.so.cache", O_RDONLY) = 3
open("/lib64/librt.so.1", O_RDONLY) = 3
open("/lib64/libselinux.so.1", O_RDONLY) = 3
open("/lib64/libacl.so.1", O_RDONLY) = 3
open("/lib64/libc.so.6", O_RDONLY) = 3
open("/lib64/libpthread.so.0", O_RDONLY) = 3
[...]
open("/usr/lib/locale/cs_CZ.utf8/LC_CTYPE", O_RDONLY) = 3
open(".", O_RDONLY|O_NONBLOCK|O_DIRECTORY|O_CLOEXEC) = 3
write(1, "addressbook.db.bak\nbin\ncxoffice\n"..., 311) = 311

To trace only network related system calls, use -e trace=network :

tux > strace -e trace=network -p 26520

Process 26520 attached - interrupt to quit
socket(PF_NETLINK, SOCK_RAW, 0) = 50
bind(50, {sa_family=AF_NETLINK, pid=0, groups=00000000}, 12) = 0
getsockname(50, {sa_family=AF_NETLINK, pid=26520, groups=00000000}, \
[12]) = 0
sendto(50, "\24\0\0\0\26\0\1\3~p\315K\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0", 20, 0,
{sa_family=AF_NETLINK, pid=0, groups=00000000}, 12) = 20
[...]

The -c calculates the time the kernel spent on each system call:

tux > strace -c find /etc -name xorg.conf

/etc/X11/xorg.conf
% time seconds usecs/call calls errors syscall
------ ----------- ----------- --------- --------- ----------------
32.38 0.000181 181 1 execve
22.00 0.000123 0 576 getdents64
19.50 0.000109 0 917 31 open
19.14 0.000107 0 888 close
4.11 0.000023 2 10 mprotect
0.00 0.000000 0 1 write
[...]
0.00 0.000000 0 1 getrlimit
0.00 0.000000 0 1 arch_prctl
0.00 0.000000 0 3 1 futex
0.00 0.000000 0 1 set_tid_address
0.00 0.000000 0 4 fadvise64
0.00 0.000000 0 1 set_robust_list

166 Tracing System Calls with strace SLED 12 SP3

------ ----------- ----------- --------- --------- ----------------
100.00 0.000559 3633 33 total

To trace all child processes of a process, use -f :

tux > strace -f rcapache2 status

execve("/usr/sbin/rcapache2", ["rcapache2", "status"], [/* 81 vars */]) = 0
brk(0) = 0x69e000
mmap(NULL, 4096, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_PRIVATE|MAP_ANONYMOUS, -1, 0) \
= 0x7f3bb553b000
mmap(NULL, 4096, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_PRIVATE|MAP_ANONYMOUS, -1, 0) \
= 0x7f3bb553a000
[...]
[pid 4823] rt_sigprocmask(SIG_SETMASK, [], <unfinished ...>
[pid 4822] close(4 <unfinished ...>
[pid 4823] <... rt_sigprocmask resumed> NULL, 8) = 0
[pid 4822] <... close resumed> ) = 0
[...]
[pid 4825] mprotect(0x7fc42cbbd000, 16384, PROT_READ) = 0
[pid 4825] mprotect(0x60a000, 4096, PROT_READ) = 0
[pid 4825] mprotect(0x7fc42cde4000, 4096, PROT_READ) = 0
[pid 4825] munmap(0x7fc42cda2000, 261953) = 0
[...]
[pid 4830] munmap(0x7fb1fff10000, 261953) = 0
[pid 4830] rt_sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, NULL, [], 8) = 0
[pid 4830] open("/dev/tty", O_RDWR|O_NONBLOCK) = 3
[pid 4830] close(3)
[...]
read(255, "\n\n# Inform the caller not only v"..., 8192) = 73
rt_sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, NULL, [], 8) = 0
rt_sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, NULL, [], 8) = 0
exit_group(0)

If you need to analyze the output of strace and the output messages are too long to be inspected
directly in the console window, use -o . In that case, unnecessary messages, such as information
about attaching and detaching processes, are suppressed. You can also suppress these messages
(normally printed on the standard output) with -q . To add time stamps at the beginning of
each line with a system call, use -t :

tux > strace -t -o strace_sleep.txt sleep 1; more strace_sleep.txt

08:44:06 execve("/bin/sleep", ["sleep", "1"], [/* 81 vars */]) = 0
08:44:06 brk(0) = 0x606000
08:44:06 mmap(NULL, 4096, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_PRIVATE|MAP_ANONYMOUS, \
-1, 0) = 0x7f8e78cc5000
[...]
08:44:06 close(3) = 0

167 Tracing System Calls with strace SLED 12 SP3

08:44:06 nanosleep({1, 0}, NULL) = 0
08:44:07 close(1) = 0
08:44:07 close(2) = 0
08:44:07 exit_group(0) = ?

The behavior and output format of strace can be largely controlled. For more information, see
the relevant manual page (man 1 strace).

16.2 Tracing Library Calls with ltrace

ltrace traces dynamic library calls of a process. It is used in a similar way to strace , and most
of their parameters have a very similar or identical meaning. By default, ltrace uses /etc/
ltrace.conf or ~/.ltrace.conf configuration les. You can, however, specify an alternative
one with the -F CONFIG_FILE option.
In addition to library calls, ltrace with the -S option can trace system calls as well:

tux > ltrace -S -o ltrace_find.txt find /etc -name \

xorg.conf; more ltrace_find.txt
SYS_brk(NULL) = 0x00628000
SYS_mmap(0, 4096, 3, 34, 0xffffffff) = 0x7f1327ea1000
SYS_mmap(0, 4096, 3, 34, 0xffffffff) = 0x7f1327ea0000
[...]
fnmatch("xorg.conf", "xorg.conf", 0) = 0
free(0x0062db80) = <void>
__errno_location() = 0x7f1327e5d698
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max(0x7fff25227af0, 8192, 0x62e020, -1, 0) = 6
__ctype_get_mb_cur_max(0x7fff25227af0, 18, 0x7f1327e5d6f0, 0x7fff25227af0,
0x62e031) = 6
__fprintf_chk(0x7f1327821780, 1, 0x420cf7, 0x7fff25227af0, 0x62e031
<unfinished ...>
SYS_fstat(1, 0x7fff25227230) = 0
SYS_mmap(0, 4096, 3, 34, 0xffffffff) = 0x7f1327e72000
SYS_write(1, "/etc/X11/xorg.conf\n", 19) = 19
[...]

You can change the type of traced events with the -e option. The following example prints
library calls related to fnmatch and strlen functions:

tux > ltrace -e fnmatch,strlen find /etc -name xorg.conf

[...]
fnmatch("xorg.conf", "xorg.conf", 0) = 0
strlen("Xresources") = 10

168 Tracing Library Calls with ltrace SLED 12 SP3

strlen("Xresources") = 10
strlen("Xresources") = 10
fnmatch("xorg.conf", "Xresources", 0) = 1
strlen("xorg.conf.install") = 17
[...]

To display only the symbols included in a specific library, use -l /path/to/library :

tux > ltrace -l /lib64/librt.so.1 sleep 1

clock_gettime(1, 0x7fff4b5c34d0, 0, 0, 0) = 0
clock_gettime(1, 0x7fff4b5c34c0, 0xffffffffff600180, -1, 0) = 0
+++ exited (status 0) +++

You can make the output more readable by indenting each nested call by the specified number
of space with the -n NUM_OF_SPACES .

16.3 Debugging and Profiling with Valgrind

Valgrind is a set of tools to debug and profile your programs so that they can run both faster and
with less errors. Valgrind can detect problems related to memory management and threading,
or can also serve as a framework for building new debugging tools. It is well known that this
tool can incur high overhead, causing, for example, higher runtimes or changing the normal
program behavior under concurrent workloads based on timing.

16.3.1 Installation
Valgrind is not shipped with standard SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop distribution. To install it
on your system, you need to obtain SUSE Software Development Kit, and either install it and run
zypper install VALGRIND

or browse through the SUSE Software Development Kit directory tree, locate the Valgrind pack-
age and install it with
rpm -i valgrind- VERSION_ARCHITECTURE .rpm

The SDK is a module for SUSE Linux Enterprise and is available via an online channel from the
SUSE Customer Center. Alternatively download it from http://download.suse.com/ . (Search for
SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit ). Refer to Book “Deployment Guide”,
Chapter 10 “Installing Modules, Extensions, and Third Party Add-On Products” for details.

169 Debugging and Profiling with Valgrind SLED 12 SP3

16.3.2 Supported Architectures
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop supports Valgrind on the following architectures:

AMD64/Intel 64

POWER

z Systems

16.3.3 General Information

The main advantage of Valgrind is that it works with existing compiled executables. You do not
need to recompile or modify your programs to use it. Run Valgrind like this:
valgrind VALGRIND_OPTIONS your-prog YOUR-PROGRAM-OPTIONS

Valgrind consists of several tools, and each provides specific functionality. Information in this
section is general and valid regardless of the used tool. The most important configuration option
is --tool . This option tells Valgrind which tool to run. If you omit this option, memcheck is
selected by default. For example, to run find ~ -name .bashrc with Valgrind's memcheck tools,
enter the following in the command line:
valgrind --tool =memcheck nd ~ -name .bashrc

A list of standard Valgrind tools with a brief description follows:

memcheck
Detects memory errors. It helps you tune your programs to behave correctly.

cachegrind
Profiles cache prediction. It helps you tune your programs to run faster.

callgrind
Works in a similar way to cachegrind but also gathers additional cache-profiling infor-
mation.

exp-drd
Detects thread errors. It helps you tune your multi-threaded programs to behave correctly.

helgrind
Another thread error detector. Similar to exp-drd but uses different techniques for prob-
lem analysis.

170 Supported Architectures SLED 12 SP3

massif
A heap profiler. Heap is an area of memory used for dynamic memory allocation. This tool
helps you tune your program to use less memory.

lackey
An example tool showing instrumentation basics.

16.3.4 Default Options

Valgrind can read options at start-up. There are three places which Valgrind checks:

1. The le .valgrindrc in the home directory of the user who runs Valgrind.

2. The environment variable $VALGRIND_OPTS

3. The le .valgrindrc in the current directory where Valgrind is run from.

These resources are parsed exactly in this order, while later given options take precedence over
earlier processed options. Options specific to a particular Valgrind tool must be prefixed with
the tool name and a colon. For example, if you want cachegrind to always write profile data to
the /tmp/cachegrind_PID.log , add the following line to the .valgrindrc le in your home
directory:
--cachegrind:cachegrind-out-file=/tmp/cachegrind_%p.log

16.3.5 How Valgrind Works

Valgrind takes control of your executable before it starts. It reads debugging information from
the executable and related shared libraries. The executable's code is redirected to the selected
Valgrind tool, and the tool adds its own code to handle its debugging. Then the code is handed
back to the Valgrind core and the execution continues.
For example, memcheck adds its code, which checks every memory access. As a consequence,
the program runs much slower than in the native execution environment.
Valgrind simulates every instruction of your program. Therefore, it not only checks the code of
your program, but also all related libraries (including the C library), libraries used for graphi-
cal environment, and so on. If you try to detect errors with Valgrind, it also detects errors in
associated libraries (like C, X11, or Gtk libraries). Because you probably do not need these er-
rors, Valgrind can selectively, suppress these error messages to suppression les. The --gen-
suppressions=yes tells Valgrind to report these suppressions which you can copy to a le.

171 Default Options SLED 12 SP3

You should supply a real executable (machine code) as a Valgrind argument. If your application
is run, for example, from a shell or Perl script, you will by mistake get error reports related to
/bin/sh (or /usr/bin/perl ). In such cases, you can use --trace-children=yes to work
around this issue. However, using the executable itself will avoid any confusion over this issue.

16.3.6 Messages
During its runtime, Valgrind reports messages with detailed errors and important events. The
following example explains the messages:

tux > valgrind --tool=memcheck find ~ -name .bashrc

[...]
==6558== Conditional jump or move depends on uninitialised value(s)
==6558== at 0x400AE79: _dl_relocate_object (in /lib64/ld-2.11.1.so)
==6558== by 0x4003868: dl_main (in /lib64/ld-2.11.1.so)
[...]
==6558== Conditional jump or move depends on uninitialised value(s)
==6558== at 0x400AE82: _dl_relocate_object (in /lib64/ld-2.11.1.so)
==6558== by 0x4003868: dl_main (in /lib64/ld-2.11.1.so)
[...]
==6558== ERROR SUMMARY: 2 errors from 2 contexts (suppressed: 0 from 0)
==6558== malloc/free: in use at exit: 2,228 bytes in 8 blocks.
==6558== malloc/free: 235 allocs, 227 frees, 489,675 bytes allocated.
==6558== For counts of detected errors, rerun with: -v
==6558== searching for pointers to 8 not-freed blocks.
==6558== checked 122,584 bytes.
==6558==
==6558== LEAK SUMMARY:
==6558== definitely lost: 0 bytes in 0 blocks.
==6558== possibly lost: 0 bytes in 0 blocks.
==6558== still reachable: 2,228 bytes in 8 blocks.
==6558== suppressed: 0 bytes in 0 blocks.
==6558== Rerun with --leak-check=full to see details of leaked memory.

The ==6558== introduces Valgrind's messages and contains the process ID number (PID). You
can easily distinguish Valgrind's messages from the output of the program itself, and decide
which messages belong to a particular process.
To make Valgrind's messages more detailed, use -v or even -v -v .

172 Messages SLED 12 SP3

You can make Valgrind send its messages to three different places:

1. By default, Valgrind sends its messages to the le descriptor 2, which is the standard error
output. You can tell Valgrind to send its messages to any other le descriptor with the --
log-fd=FILE_DESCRIPTOR_NUMBER option.

2. The second and probably more useful way is to send Valgrind's messages to a le with --
log-file=FILENAME . This option accepts several variables, for example, %p gets replaced
with the PID of the currently profiled process. This way you can send messages to different
les based on their PID. %q{env_var} is replaced with the value of the related env_var
environment variable.
The following example checks for possible memory errors during the Apache Web server
restart, while following children processes and writing detailed Valgrind's messages to
separate les distinguished by the current process PID:

tux > valgrind -v --tool=memcheck --trace-children=yes \

--log-file=valgrind_pid_%p.log rcapache2 restart

This process created 52 log les in the testing system, and took 75 seconds instead of the
usual 7 seconds needed to run sudo systemctl restart apache2 without Valgrind,
which is approximately 10 times more.

tux > ls -1 valgrind_pid_*log

valgrind_pid_11780.log
valgrind_pid_11782.log
valgrind_pid_11783.log
[...]
valgrind_pid_11860.log
valgrind_pid_11862.log
valgrind_pid_11863.log

3. You may also prefer to send the Valgrind's messages over the network. You need to specify
the aa.bb.cc.dd IP address and port_num port number of the network socket with the
--log-socket=AA.BB.CC.DD:PORT_NUM option. If you omit the port number, 1500 will
be used.
It is useless to send Valgrind's messages to a network socket if no application is capable
of receiving them on the remote machine. That is why valgrind-listener , a simple
listener, is shipped together with Valgrind. It accepts connections on the specified port and
copies everything it receives to the standard output.

173 Messages SLED 12 SP3

16.3.7 Error Messages
Valgrind remembers all error messages, and if it detects a new error, the error is compared
against old error messages. This way Valgrind checks for duplicate error messages. In case of
a duplicate error, it is recorded but no message is shown. This mechanism prevents you from
being overwhelmed by millions of duplicate errors.
The -v option will add a summary of all reports (sorted by their total count) to the end of the
Valgrind's execution output. Moreover, Valgrind stops collecting errors if it detects either 1000
different errors, or 10 000 000 errors in total. If you want to suppress this limit and wish to see
all error messages, use --error-limit=no .
Some errors usually cause other ones. Therefore, x errors in the same order as they appear and
re-check the program continuously.

16.4 For More Information

For a complete list of options related to the described tracing tools, see the corresponding
man page ( man 1 strace , man 1 ltrace , and man 1 valgrind ).

To describe advanced usage of Valgrind is beyond the scope of this document. It is

very well documented, see Valgrind User Manual (http://valgrind.org/docs/manual/manu-
al.html) . These pages are indispensable if you need more advanced information on Val-
grind or the usage and purpose of its standard tools.

174 Error Messages SLED 12 SP3

17 Kexec and Kdump
Kexec is a tool to boot to another kernel from the currently running one. You can perform faster
system reboots without any hardware initialization. You can also prepare the system to boot to
another kernel if the system crashes.

17.1 Introduction
With Kexec, you can replace the running kernel with another one without a hard reboot. The
tool is useful for several reasons:

Faster system rebooting

If you need to reboot the system frequently, Kexec can save you significant time.

Avoiding unreliable rmware and hardware

Computer hardware is complex and serious problems may occur during the system start-
up. You cannot always replace unreliable hardware immediately. Kexec boots the kernel
to a controlled environment with the hardware already initialized. The risk of unsuccessful
system start is then minimized.

Saving the dump of a crashed kernel

Kexec preserves the contents of the physical memory. After the production kernel fails, the
capture kernel (an additional kernel running in a reserved memory range) saves the state
of the failed kernel. The saved image can help you with the subsequent analysis.

Booting without GRUB 2 configuration

When the system boots a kernel with Kexec, it skips the boot loader stage. The normal
booting procedure can fail because of an error in the boot loader configuration. With Kexec,
you do not depend on a working boot loader configuration.

17.2 Required Packages

To use Kexec on SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop to speed up reboots or avoid potential hard-
ware problems, make sure that the package kexec-tools is installed. It contains a script called
kexec-bootloader , which reads the boot loader configuration and runs Kexec using the same
kernel options as the normal boot loader.

175 Introduction SLED 12 SP3

To set up an environment that helps you obtain debug information in case of a kernel crash,
make sure that the package makedumpfile is installed.
The preferred method of using Kdump in SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop is through the YaST
Kdump module. To use the YaST module, make sure that the package yast2-kdump is installed.

17.3 Kexec Internals

The most important component of Kexec is the /sbin/kexec command. You can load a kernel
with Kexec in two different ways:

Load the kernel to the address space of a production kernel for a regular reboot:

root # kexec -l KERNEL_IMAGE

You can later boot to this kernel with kexec -e .

Load the kernel to a reserved area of memory:

root # kexec -p KERNEL_IMAGE

This kernel will be booted automatically when the system crashes.

If you want to boot another kernel and preserve the data of the production kernel when the
system crashes, you need to reserve a dedicated area of the system memory. The production
kernel never loads to this area because it must be always available. It is used for the capture
kernel so that the memory pages of the production kernel can be preserved.
To reserve the area, append the option crashkernel to the boot command line of the produc-
tion kernel. To determine the necessary values for crashkernel , follow the instructions in Sec-
tion 17.4, “Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size”.

Note that this is not a parameter of the capture kernel. The capture kernel does not use Kexec.
The capture kernel is loaded to the reserved area and waits for the kernel to crash. Then, Kdump
tries to invoke the capture kernel because the production kernel is no longer reliable at this
stage. This means that even Kdump can fail.
To load the capture kernel, you need to include the kernel boot parameters. Usually, the initial
RAM le system is used for booting. You can specify it with --initrd = FILENAME . With --
append = CMDLINE , you append options to the command line of the kernel to boot.

176 Kexec Internals SLED 12 SP3

It is helpful to include the command line of the production kernel if these options are necessary
for the kernel to boot. You can simply copy the command line with --append = "$(cat /proc/
cmdline)" or add more options with --append = "$(cat /proc/cmdline) more_options" .

You can always unload the previously loaded kernel. To unload a kernel that was loaded with
the -l option, use the kexec -u command. To unload a crash kernel loaded with the -p
option, use kexec -p -u command.

17.4 Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size

To use Kexec with a capture kernel and to use Kdump in any way, RAM needs to be allocated
for the capture kernel. The allocation size depends on the expected hardware configuration of
the computer, therefore you need to specify it.
The allocation size also depends on the hardware architecture of your computer. Make sure to
follow the procedure intended for your system architecture.

PROCEDURE 17.1: ALLOCATION SIZE ON AMD64/INTEL 64

1. To nd out the base value for the computer, run the following in a terminal:

root # kdumptool calibrate

This command returns a list of values. All values are given in megabytes.

2. Write down the values of Low and High .

Note: Significance of Low and High Values

On AMD64/Intel 64 computers, the High value stands for the memory reservation
for all available memory. The Low value stands for the memory reservation in the
DMA32 zone, that is, all the memory up to the 4 GB mark.
If the computer has less than 4 GB of RAM, the High memory reservation is allo-
cated and the Low memory reservation is ignored. If the computer has more than
4 GB of RAM, the Low memory reservation is allocated additionally.

177 Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size SLED 12 SP3

 3. Adapt the High value from the previous step for the number of LUN kernel paths (paths to
storage devices) attached to the computer. A sensible value in megabytes can be calculated
using this formula:

SIZE_HIGH = RECOMMENDATION + (LUNs / 2)

The following parameters are used in this formula:

SIZE_HIGH.  The resulting value for High .

RECOMMENDATION.  The value recommended by kdumptool calibrate for High .

LUNs.  The maximum number of LUN kernel paths that you expect to ever create on
the computer. Exclude multipath devices from this number, as these are ignored.

Important: Adjust for Large Amounts of RAM

For machines that have multiple terabytes (!) of RAM, such as many servers running
SAP HANA, you need to additionally adjust the amount of both Kdump High and
Low Memory.
Experience suggests that in such cases, you might be successful using the following
formulas:

SIZE_HIGH = (RECOMMENDATION * RAM_IN_TB) + (LUNs / 2)

SIZE_LOW = (RECOMMENDATION * RAM_IN_TB) + CUSTOM_DRIVER-

RESERVATION_ADJUSTMENT

4. If the drivers for your device make many reservations in the DMA32 zone, the Low value
also needs to be adjusted. However, there is no simple formula to calculate these. Finding
the right size can therefore be a process of trial and error.
For the beginning, use the Low value recommended by kdumptool calibrate .

5. The values now need to be set in the correct location.

If you are changing the kernel command line directly

Append the following kernel option to your boot loader configuration:

crashkernel=SIZE_HIGH,high crashkernel=SIZE_LOW,low

178 Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size SLED 12 SP3

 Replace the placeholders SIZE_HIGH and SIZE_LOW with the appropriate value
from the previous steps and append the letter M (for megabytes).
As an example, the following is valid:

crashkernel=36M,high crashkernel=72M,low

If you are using the YaST GUI:

Set Kdump Low Memory to the determined Low value.
Set Kdump High Memory to the determined High value.

If you are using the YaST command line interface:

Use the following command:

root # yast kdump startup enable alloc_mem=LOW,HIGH

Replace LOW with the determined Low value. Replace HIGH with the determined
HIGH value.

PROCEDURE 17.2: ALLOCATION SIZE ON POWER AND Z SYSTEMS

1. To nd out the basis value for the computer, run the following in a terminal:

root # kdumptool calibrate

This command returns a list of values. All values are given in megabytes.

2. Write down the value of Low .

3. Adapt the Low value from the previous step for the number of LUN kernel paths (paths to
storage devices) attached to the computer. A sensible value in megabytes can be calculated
using this formula:

SIZE_LOW = RECOMMENDATION + (LUNs / 2)

The following parameters are used in this formula:

SIZE_LOW.  The resulting value for Low .

RECOMMENDATION.  The value recommended by kdumptool calibrate for Low .

LUNs.  The maximum number of LUN kernel paths that you expect to ever create on
the computer. Exclude multipath devices from this number, as these are ignored.

179 Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size SLED 12 SP3

 4. The values now need to be set in the correct location.

If you are working on the command line

Append the following kernel option to your boot loader configuration:

crashkernel=SIZE_LOW

Replace the placeholder SIZE_LOW with the appropriate value from the previous step
and append the letter M (for megabytes).
As an example, the following is valid:

crashkernel=108M

If you are working in YaST

Set Kdump Memory to the determined Low value.

Tip: Excluding Unused and Inactive CCW Devices on IBM z Systems

Depending on the number of available devices the calculated amount of memory specified
by the crashkernel kernel parameter may not be sufficient. Instead of increasing the
value, you may alternatively limit the amount of devices visible to the kernel. This will
lower the required amount of memory for the "crashkernel" setting.

1. To ignore devices you can run the cio_ignore tool to generate an appropriate
stanza to ignore all devices, except the ones currently active or in use.

tux > sudo cio_ignore -u -k

cio_ignore=all,!da5d,!f500-f502

When you run cio_ignore -u -k , the blacklist will become active and replace
any existing blacklist immediately. Unused devices are not being purged, so they
still appear in the channel subsystem. But adding new channel devices (via CP AT-
TACH under z/VM or dynamic I/O configuration change in LPAR) will treat them as

180 Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size SLED 12 SP3

 blacklisted. To prevent this, preserve the original setting by running sudo cio_ig-
nore -l rst and reverting to that state after running cio_ignore -u -k . As an
alternative, add the generated stanza to the regular kernel boot parameters.

2. Now add the cio_ignore kernel parameter with the stanza from above to
KDUMP_CMDLINE_APPEND in /etc/sysconfig/kdump , for example:

KDUMP_COMMANDLINE_APPEND="cio_ignore=all,!da5d,!f500-f502"

3. Activate the setting by restarting kdump :

systemctl restart kdump.service

17.5 Basic Kexec Usage

To verify if your Kexec environment works properly, follow these steps:

1. Make sure no users are currently logged in and no important services are running on the
system.

2. Log in as root .

3. Switch to the rescue target with systemctl isolate rescue.target

4. Load the new kernel to the address space of the production kernel with the following
command:

root # kexec -l /boot/vmlinuz --append="$(cat /proc/cmdline)" \

--initrd=/boot/initrd

5. Unmount all mounted le systems except the root le system with:

umount -a

Important: Unmounting the Root File System

Unmounting all le systems will most likely produce a device is busy warning
message. The root le system cannot be unmounted if the system is running. Ignore
the warning.

181 Basic Kexec Usage SLED 12 SP3

 6. Remount the root le system in read-only mode:

root # mount -o remount,ro /

7. Initiate the reboot of the kernel that you loaded in Step 4 with:

root # kexec -e

It is important to unmount the previously mounted disk volumes in read-write mode. The re-
boot system call acts immediately upon calling. Hard disk volumes mounted in read-write mode
neither synchronize nor unmount automatically. The new kernel may nd them “dirty”. Read-
only disk volumes and virtual le systems do not need to be unmounted. Refer to /etc/mtab
to determine which le systems you need to unmount.
The new kernel previously loaded to the address space of the older kernel rewrites it and takes
control immediately. It displays the usual start-up messages. When the new kernel boots, it skips
all hardware and rmware checks. Make sure no warning messages appear. All le systems are
supposed to be clean if they had been unmounted.

17.6 How to Configure Kexec for Routine Reboots

Kexec is often used for frequent reboots. For example, if it takes a long time to run through the
hardware detection routines or if the start-up is not reliable.
Note that rmware and the boot loader are not used when the system reboots with Kexec. Any
changes you make to the boot loader configuration will be ignored until the computer performs
a hard reboot.

17.7 Basic Kdump Configuration

You can use Kdump to save kernel dumps. If the kernel crashes, it is useful to copy the memory
image of the crashed environment to the le system. You can then debug the dump le to nd
the cause of the kernel crash. This is called “core dump”.
Kdump works similarly to Kexec (see Chapter 17, Kexec and Kdump). The capture kernel is executed
after the running production kernel crashes. The difference is that Kexec replaces the production
kernel with the capture kernel. With Kdump, you still have access to the memory space of the
crashed production kernel. You can save the memory snapshot of the crashed kernel in the
environment of the Kdump kernel.

182 How to Configure Kexec for Routine Reboots SLED 12 SP3

 Tip: Dumps over Network
In environments with limited local storage, you need to set up kernel dumps over the
network. Kdump supports configuring the specified network interface and bringing it up
via initrd . Both LAN and VLAN interfaces are supported. Specify the network interface
and the mode (DHCP or static) either with YaST, or using the KDUMP_NETCONFIG option
in the /etc/sysconfig/kdump le.

Important: Target File System for Kdump Must Be Mounted During

Configuration
When configuring Kdump, you can specify a location to which the dumped images will be
saved (default: /var/crash ). This location must be mounted when configuring Kdump,
otherwise the configuration will fail.

17.7.1 Manual Kdump Configuration

Kdump reads its configuration from the /etc/sysconfig/kdump le. To make sure that Kdump
works on your system, its default configuration is sufficient. To use Kdump with the default
settings, follow these steps:

1. Determine the amount of memory needed for Kdump by following the instructions in
Section 17.4, “Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size”. Make sure to set the kernel parameter
crashkernel .

2. Reboot the computer.

3. Enable the Kdump service:

root # systemctl enable kdump

4. You can edit the options in /etc/sysconfig/kdump . Reading the comments will help you
understand the meaning of individual options.

5. Execute the init script once with sudo systemctl start kdump , or reboot the system.

183 Manual Kdump Configuration SLED 12 SP3

After configuring Kdump with the default values, check if it works as expected. Make sure that
no users are currently logged in and no important services are running on your system. Then
follow these steps:

1. Switch to the rescue target with systemctl isolate rescue.target

2. Restart the Kdump service:

root # systemctl start kdump

3. Unmount all the disk le systems except the root le system with:

root # umount -a

4. Remount the root le system in read-only mode:

root # mount -o remount,ro /

5. Invoke a “kernel panic” with the procfs interface to Magic SysRq keys:

root # echo c > /proc/sysrq-trigger

Important: Size of Kernel Dumps

The KDUMP_KEEP_OLD_DUMPS option controls the number of preserved kernel dumps (de-
fault is 5). Without compression, the size of the dump can take up to the size of the phys-
ical RAM memory. Make sure you have sufficient space on the /var partition.

The capture kernel boots and the crashed kernel memory snapshot is saved to the le sys-
tem. The save path is given by the KDUMP_SAVEDIR option and it defaults to /var/crash . If
KDUMP_IMMEDIATE_REBOOT is set to yes , the system automatically reboots the production ker-
nel. Log in and check that the dump has been created under /var/crash .

17.7.1.1 Static IP Configuration for Kdump

In case Kdump is configured to use a static IP configuration from a network device, you need to
add the network configuration to the KDUMP_COMMANDLINE_APPEND variable in /etc/syscon-
fig/kdump .

184 Manual Kdump Configuration SLED 12 SP3

EXAMPLE 17.1: KDUMP: EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION USING A STATIC IP SETUP

The following setup has been configured:

eth0 has been configured with the static IP address 192.168.1.1/24

eth1 has been configured with the static IP address 10.50.50.100/20

The Kdump configuration in /etc/sysconfig/kdump looks like:

KDUMP_CPUS=1
KDUMP_IMMEDIATE_REBOOT=yes
KDUMP_SAVEDIR=ftp://[email protected]/crashdump/
KDUMP_KEEP_OLD_DUMPS=5
KDUMP_FREE_DISK_SIZE=64
KDUMP_VERBOSE=3
KDUMP_DUMPLEVEL=31
KDUMP_DUMPFORMAT=lzo
KDUMP_CONTINUE_ON_ERROR=yes
KDUMP_NETCONFIG=eth1:static
KDUMP_NET_TIMEOUT=30

Using this configuration, Kdump fails to reach the network when trying to write the dump
to the FTP server. To solve this issue, add the network configuration to KDUMP_COMMAN-
DLINE_APPEND in /etc/sysconfig/kdump . The general pattern for this looks like the
following:

KDUMP_COMMANDLINE_APPEND='ip=CLIENT IP:SERVER IP:GATEWAY IP:NETMASK:CLIENT

HOSTNAME:DEVICE:PROTOCOL'

For the example configuration this would result in:

KDUMP_COMMANDLINE_APPEND='ip=10.50.50.100:10.50.50.140:10.60.48.1:255.255.240.0:dump-
client:eth1:none'

17.7.2 YaST Configuration

To configure Kdump with YaST, you need to install the yast2-kdump package. Then either start
the Kernel Kdump module in the System category of YaST Control Center, or enter yast2 kdump
in the command line as root .

185 YaST Configuration SLED 12 SP3

FIGURE 17.1: YAST KDUMP MODULE: START-UP PAGE

In the Start-Up window, select Enable Kdump.

The values for Kdump Memory are automatically generated the rst time you open the window.
However, that does not mean that they are always sufficient. To set the right values, follow the
instructions in Section 17.4, “Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size”.

Important: After Hardware Changes, Set Kdump Memory Values

Again
If you have set up Kdump on a computer and later decide to change the amount of RAM or
hard disks available to it, YaST will continue to display and use outdated memory values.
To work around this, determine the necessary memory again, as described in Section 17.4,
“Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size”. Then set it manually in YaST.

Click Dump Filtering in the left pane, and check what pages to include in the dump. You do not
need to include the following memory content to be able to debug kernel problems:

Pages lled with zero

Cache pages

User data pages

Free pages

In the Dump Target window, select the type of the dump target and the URL where you want
to save the dump. If you selected a network protocol, such as FTP or SSH, you need to enter
relevant access information as well.

186 YaST Configuration SLED 12 SP3

 Tip: Sharing the Dump Directory with Other Applications
It is possible to specify a path for saving Kdump dumps where other applications also
save their dumps. When cleaning its old dump les, Kdump will safely ignore other ap-
plications' dump les.

Fill the Email Notification window information if you want Kdump to inform you about its events
via e-mail and confirm your changes with OK after ne tuning Kdump in the Expert Settings
window. Kdump is now configured.

17.8 Analyzing the Crash Dump

After you obtain the dump, it is time to analyze it. There are several options.
The original tool to analyze the dumps is GDB. You can even use it in the latest environments,
although it has several disadvantages and limitations:

GDB was not specifically designed to debug kernel dumps.

GDB does not support ELF64 binaries on 32-bit platforms.

GDB does not understand other formats than ELF dumps (it cannot debug compressed
dumps).

That is why the crash utility was implemented. It analyzes crash dumps and debugs the running
system as well. It provides functionality specific to debugging the Linux kernel and is much
more suitable for advanced debugging.
If you want to debug the Linux kernel, you need to install its debugging information package in
addition. Check if the package is installed on your system with:

tux > zypper se kernel | grep debug

Important: Repository for Packages with Debugging Information

If you subscribed your system for online updates, you can nd “debuginfo” packages in the
*-Debuginfo-Updates online installation repository relevant for SUSE Linux Enterprise
Desktop 12 SP3. Use YaST to enable the repository.

187 Analyzing the Crash Dump SLED 12 SP3

To open the captured dump in crash on the machine that produced the dump, use a command
like this:

crash /boot/vmlinux-2.6.32.8-0.1-default.gz \
/var/crash/2010-04-23-11\:17/vmcore

The rst parameter represents the kernel image. The second parameter is the dump le captured
by Kdump. You can nd this le under /var/crash by default.

Tip: Getting Basic Information from a Kernel Crash Dump

SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop ships with the utility kdumpid (included in a package
with the same name) for identifying unknown kernel dumps. It can be used to extract
basic information such as architecture and kernel release. It supports lkcd, diskdump,
Kdump les and ELF dumps. When called with the -v switch it tries to extract additional
information such as machine type, kernel banner string and kernel configuration flavor.

17.8.1 Kernel Binary Formats

The Linux kernel comes in Executable and Linkable Format (ELF). This le is usually called
vmlinux and is directly generated in the compilation process. Not all boot loaders support
ELF binaries, especially on the AMD64/Intel 64 architecture. The following solutions exist on
different architectures supported by SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop.

17.8.1.1 AMD64/Intel 64
Kernel packages for AMD64/Intel 64 from SUSE contain two kernel les: vmlinuz and vmlin-
ux.gz .

vmlinuz .  This is the le executed by the boot loader.

The Linux kernel consists of two parts: the kernel itself ( vmlinux ) and the setup code
run by the boot loader. These two parts are linked together to create vmlinuz (note the
distinction: z compared to x ).
In the kernel source tree, the le is called bzImage .

vmlinux.gz .  This is a compressed ELF image that can be used by crash and GDB. The
ELF image is never used by the boot loader itself on AMD64/Intel 64. Therefore, only a
compressed version is shipped.

188 Kernel Binary Formats SLED 12 SP3

17.8.1.2 POWER
The yaboot boot loader on POWER also supports loading ELF images, but not compressed ones.
In the POWER kernel package, there is an ELF Linux kernel le vmlinux . Considering crash ,
this is the easiest architecture.
If you decide to analyze the dump on another machine, you must check both the architecture
of the computer and the les necessary for debugging.
You can analyze the dump on another computer only if it runs a Linux system of the same
architecture. To check the compatibility, use the command uname -i on both computers and
compare the outputs.
If you are going to analyze the dump on another computer, you also need the appropriate les
from the kernel and kernel debug packages.

1. Put the kernel dump, the kernel image from /boot , and its associated debugging info le
from /usr/lib/debug/boot into a single empty directory.

2. Additionally, copy the kernel modules from /lib/modules/$(uname -r)/kernel/ and

the associated debug info les from /usr/lib/debug/lib/modules/$(uname -r)/ker-
nel/ into a subdirectory named modules .

3. In the directory with the dump, the kernel image, its debug info le, and the modules
subdirectory, start the crash utility:

tux > crash VMLINUX-VERSION vmcore

Regardless of the computer on which you analyze the dump, the crash utility will produce output
similar to this:

tux > crash /boot/vmlinux-2.6.32.8-0.1-default.gz \

/var/crash/2010-04-23-11\:17/vmcore

crash 4.0-7.6
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright (C) 2004, 2005, 2006 IBM Corporation
Copyright (C) 1999-2006 Hewlett-Packard Co
Copyright (C) 2005, 2006 Fujitsu Limited
Copyright (C) 2006, 2007 VA Linux Systems Japan K.K.
Copyright (C) 2005 NEC Corporation
Copyright (C) 1999, 2002, 2007 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Mission Critical Linux, Inc.
This program is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License,
and you are welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it under

189 Kernel Binary Formats SLED 12 SP3

certain conditions. Enter "help copying" to see the conditions.
This program has absolutely no warranty. Enter "help warranty" for details.

GNU gdb 6.1

Copyright 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
GDB is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License, and you are
welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it under certain conditions.
Type "show copying" to see the conditions.
There is absolutely no warranty for GDB. Type "show warranty" for details.
This GDB was configured as "x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu"...

KERNEL: /boot/vmlinux-2.6.32.8-0.1-default.gz
DEBUGINFO: /usr/lib/debug/boot/vmlinux-2.6.32.8-0.1-default.debug
DUMPFILE: /var/crash/2009-04-23-11:17/vmcore
CPUS: 2
DATE: Thu Apr 23 13:17:01 2010
UPTIME: 00:10:41
LOAD AVERAGE: 0.01, 0.09, 0.09
TASKS: 42
NODENAME: eros
RELEASE: 2.6.32.8-0.1-default
VERSION: #1 SMP 2010-03-31 14:50:44 +0200
MACHINE: x86_64 (2999 Mhz)
MEMORY: 1 GB
PANIC: "SysRq : Trigger a crashdump"
PID: 9446
COMMAND: "bash"
TASK: ffff88003a57c3c0 [THREAD_INFO: ffff880037168000]
CPU: 1
STATE: TASK_RUNNING (SYSRQ)
crash>

The command output prints rst useful data: There were 42 tasks running at the moment of the
kernel crash. The cause of the crash was a SysRq trigger invoked by the task with PID 9446. It
was a Bash process because the echo that has been used is an internal command of the Bash
shell.
The crash utility builds upon GDB and provides many additional commands. If you enter bt
without any parameters, the backtrace of the task running at the moment of the crash is printed:

crash> bt
PID: 9446 TASK: ffff88003a57c3c0 CPU: 1 COMMAND: "bash"
#0 [ffff880037169db0] crash_kexec at ffffffff80268fd6
#1 [ffff880037169e80] __handle_sysrq at ffffffff803d50ed
#2 [ffff880037169ec0] write_sysrq_trigger at ffffffff802f6fc5
#3 [ffff880037169ed0] proc_reg_write at ffffffff802f068b

190 Kernel Binary Formats SLED 12 SP3

 #4 [ffff880037169f10] vfs_write at ffffffff802b1aba
#5 [ffff880037169f40] sys_write at ffffffff802b1c1f
#6 [ffff880037169f80] system_call_fastpath at ffffffff8020bfbb
RIP: 00007fa958991f60 RSP: 00007fff61330390 RFLAGS: 00010246
RAX: 0000000000000001 RBX: ffffffff8020bfbb RCX: 0000000000000001
RDX: 0000000000000002 RSI: 00007fa959284000 RDI: 0000000000000001
RBP: 0000000000000002 R8: 00007fa9592516f0 R9: 00007fa958c209c0
R10: 00007fa958c209c0 R11: 0000000000000246 R12: 00007fa958c1f780
R13: 00007fa959284000 R14: 0000000000000002 R15: 00000000595569d0
ORIG_RAX: 0000000000000001 CS: 0033 SS: 002b
crash>

Now it is clear what happened: The internal echo command of Bash shell sent a character to
/proc/sysrq-trigger . After the corresponding handler recognized this character, it invoked
the crash_kexec() function. This function called panic() and Kdump saved a dump.
In addition to the basic GDB commands and the extended version of bt , the crash utility defines
other commands related to the structure of the Linux kernel. These commands understand the
internal data structures of the Linux kernel and present their contents in a human readable for-
mat. For example, you can list the tasks running at the moment of the crash with ps . With sym ,
you can list all the kernel symbols with the corresponding addresses, or inquire an individual
symbol for its value. With files , you can display all the open le descriptors of a process. With
kmem , you can display details about the kernel memory usage. With vm , you can inspect the
virtual memory of a process, even at the level of individual page mappings. The list of useful
commands is very long and many of these accept a wide range of options.
The commands that we mentioned reflect the functionality of the common Linux commands,
such as ps and lsof . To nd out the exact sequence of events with the debugger, you need to
know how to use GDB and to have strong debugging skills. Both of these are out of the scope of
this document. In addition, you need to understand the Linux kernel. Several useful reference
information sources are given at the end of this document.

17.9 Advanced Kdump Configuration

The configuration for Kdump is stored in /etc/sysconfig/kdump . You can also use YaST to
configure it. Kdump configuration options are available under System Kernel Kdump in YaST
Control Center. The following Kdump options may be useful for you.
You can change the directory for the kernel dumps with the KDUMP_SAVEDIR option. Keep in
mind that the size of kernel dumps can be very large. Kdump will refuse to save the dump if
the free disk space, subtracted by the estimated dump size, drops below the value specified by

191 Advanced Kdump Configuration SLED 12 SP3

the KDUMP_FREE_DISK_SIZE option. Note that KDUMP_SAVEDIR understands the URL format
PROTOCOL://SPECIFICATION , where PROTOCOL is one of file , ftp , sftp , nfs or cifs , and
specification varies for each protocol. For example, to save kernel dump on an FTP server,
use the following URL as a template: ftp://username:[email protected]:123/var/
crash .

Kernel dumps are usually huge and contain many pages that are not necessary for analysis. With
KDUMP_DUMPLEVEL option, you can omit such pages. The option understands numeric value
between 0 and 31. If you specify 0 , the dump size will be largest. If you specify 31 , it will
produce the smallest dump. For a complete table of possible values, see the manual page of
kdump ( man 7 kdump ).

Sometimes it is very useful to make the size of the kernel dump smaller. For example, if you
want to transfer the dump over the network, or if you need to save some disk space in the dump
directory. This can be done with KDUMP_DUMPFORMAT set to compressed . The crash utility
supports dynamic decompression of the compressed dumps.

Important: Changes to the Kdump Configuration File

You always need to execute systemctl restart kdump after you make manual changes
to /etc/sysconfig/kdump . Otherwise, these changes will take effect next time you re-
boot the system.

17.10 For More Information

There is no single comprehensive reference to Kexec and Kdump usage. However, there are
helpful resources that deal with certain aspects:

For the Kexec utility usage, see the manual page of kexec ( man 8 kexec ).

IBM provides a comprehensive documentation on how to use dump tools on the z Sys-
tems architecture at http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/linux390/development_doc-
umentation.html .

You can nd general information about Kexec at http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/lin-

ux/library/l-kexec.html . Might be slightly outdated.

192 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

 For more details on Kdump specific to SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop, see http://ft-
p.suse.com/pub/people/tiwai/kdump-training/kdump-training.pdf .

An in-depth description of Kdump internals can be found at http://lse.source-

forge.net/kdump/documentation/ols2oo5-kdump-paper.pdf .

For more details on crash dump analysis and debugging tools, use the following resources:

In addition to the info page of GDB ( info gdb ), there are printable guides at http://
sourceware.org/gdb/documentation/ .

A white paper with a comprehensive description of the crash utility usage can be found at
http://people.redhat.com/anderson/crash_whitepaper/ .

The crash utility also features a comprehensive online help. Use help COMMAND to display
the online help for command .

If you have the necessary Perl skills, you can use Alicia to make the debugging easier. This
Perl-based front-end to the crash utility can be found at http://alicia.sourceforge.net/ .

If you prefer to use Python instead, you should install Pykdump. This package helps you
control GDB through Python scripts and can be downloaded from http://sf.net/projects/
pykdump .

A very comprehensive overview of the Linux kernel internals is given in Understanding the
Linux Kernel by Daniel P. Bovet and Marco Cesati (ISBN 978-0-596-00565-8).

193 For More Information SLED 12 SP3

VII Synchronized Clocks with Precision
Time Protocol

18 Precision Time Protocol 195

18 Precision Time Protocol

For network environments, it is vital to keep the computer and other devices' clocks synchro-
nized and accurate. There are several solutions to achieve this, for example the widely used
Network Time Protocol (NTP) described in Book “Administration Guide”, Chapter 25 “Time Synchro-
nization with NTP”.

The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is a protocol capable of sub-microsecond accuracy, which is
better than what NTP achieves. PTP support is divided between the kernel and user space. The
kernel in SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop includes support for PTP clocks, which are provided
by network drivers.

18.1 Introduction to PTP

The clocks managed by PTP follow a master-slave hierarchy. The slaves are synchronized to
their masters. The hierarchy is updated by the best master clock (BMC) algorithm, which runs on
every clock. The clock with only one port can be either master or slave. Such a clock is called an
ordinary clock (OC). A clock with multiple ports can be master on one port and slave on another.
Such a clock is called a boundary clock (BC). The top-level master is called the grandmaster clock.
The grandmaster clock can be synchronized with a Global Positioning System (GPS). This way
disparate networks can be synchronized with a high degree of accuracy.
The hardware support is the main advantage of PTP. It is supported by various network switches
and network interface controllers (NIC). While it is possible to use non-PTP enabled hardware
within the network, having network components between all PTP clocks PTP hardware enabled
achieves the best possible accuracy.

18.1.1 PTP Linux Implementation

On SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop, the implementation of PTP is provided by the linuxptp
package. Install it with zypper install linuxptp . It includes the ptp4l and phc2sys pro-
grams for clock synchronization. ptp4l implements the PTP boundary clock and ordinary clock.
When hardware time stamping is enabled, ptp4l synchronizes the PTP hardware clock to the
master clock. With software time stamping, it synchronizes the system clock to the master clock.
phc2sys is needed only with hardware time stamping to synchronize the system clock to the
PTP hardware clock on the network interface card (NIC).

195 Introduction to PTP SLED 12 SP3

18.2 Using PTP

18.2.1 Network Driver and Hardware Support

PTP requires that the used kernel network driver supports either software or hardware time
stamping. Moreover, the NIC must support time stamping in the physical hardware. You can
verify the driver and NIC time stamping capabilities with ethtool :

ethtool -T eth0
Time stamping parameters for eth0:
Capabilities:
hardware-transmit (SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_HARDWARE)
software-transmit (SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_SOFTWARE)
hardware-receive (SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_HARDWARE)
software-receive (SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_SOFTWARE)
software-system-clock (SOF_TIMESTAMPING_SOFTWARE)
hardware-raw-clock (SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RAW_HARDWARE)
PTP Hardware Clock: 0
Hardware Transmit Timestamp Modes:
off (HWTSTAMP_TX_OFF)
on (HWTSTAMP_TX_ON)
Hardware Receive Filter Modes:
none (HWTSTAMP_FILTER_NONE)
all (HWTSTAMP_FILTER_ALL)

Software time stamping requires the following parameters:

SOF_TIMESTAMPING_SOFTWARE
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_SOFTWARE
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_SOFTWARE

Hardware time stamping requires the following parameters:

SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RAW_HARDWARE
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_TX_HARDWARE
SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RX_HARDWARE

196 Using PTP SLED 12 SP3

18.2.2 Using ptp4l
ptp4l uses hardware time stamping by default. As root , you need to specify the network
interface capable of hardware time stamping with the -i option. The -m tells ptp4l to print
its output to the standard output instead of the system's logging facility:

ptp4l -m -i eth0
selected eth0 as PTP clock
port 1: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
port 0: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
port 1: new foreign master 00a152.fffe.0b334d-1
selected best master clock 00a152.fffe.0b334d
port 1: LISTENING to UNCALIBRATED on RS_SLAVE
master offset -25937 s0 freq +0 path delay 12340
master offset -27887 s0 freq +0 path delay 14232
master offset -38802 s0 freq +0 path delay 13847
master offset -36205 s1 freq +0 path delay 10623
master offset -6975 s2 freq -30575 path delay 10286
port 1: UNCALIBRATED to SLAVE on MASTER_CLOCK_SELECTED
master offset -4284 s2 freq -30135 path delay 9892

The master offset value represents the measured offset from the master (in nanoseconds).
The s0 , s1 , s2 indicators show the different states of the clock servo: s0 is unlocked, s1
is clock step, and s2 is locked. If the servo is in the locked state ( s2 ), the clock will not be
stepped (only slowly adjusted) if the pi_offset_const option is set to a negative value in the
configuration le (see man 8 ptp4l for more information).
The freq value represents the frequency adjustment of the clock (in parts per billion, ppb).
The path delay value represents the estimated delay of the synchronization messages sent
from the master (in nanoseconds).
Port 0 is a Unix domain socket used for local PTP management. Port 1 is the eth0 interface.
INITIALIZING , LISTENING , UNCALIBRATED and SLAVE are examples of port states which
change on INITIALIZE , RS_SLAVE , and MASTER_CLOCK_SELECTED events. When the port state
changes from UNCALIBRATED to SLAVE , the computer has successfully synchronized with a PTP
master clock.
You can enable software time stamping with the -S option.

ptp4l -m -S -i eth3

197 Using ptp4l SLED 12 SP3

You can also run ptp4l as a service:

systemctl start ptp4l

In this case, ptp4l reads its options from the /etc/sysconfig/ptp4l le. By default, this le
tells ptp4l to read the configuration options from /etc/ptp4l.conf . For more information
on ptp4l options and the configuration le settings, see man 8 ptp4l .
To enable the ptp4l service permanently, run the following:

systemctl enable ptp4l

To disable it, run

systemctl disable ptp4l

18.2.3 ptp4l Configuration File

ptp4l can read its configuration from an optional configuration le. As no configuration le
is used by default, you need to specify it with -f .

ptp4l -f /etc/ptp4l.conf

The configuration le is divided into sections. The global section (indicated as [global] ) sets
the program options, clock options and default port options. Other sections are port specific, and
they override the default port options. The name of the section is the name of the configured port
—for example, [eth0] . An empty port section can be used to replace the command line option.

[global]
verbose 1
time_stamping software
[eth0]

The example configuration le is an equivalent of the following command's options:

ptp4l -i eth0 -m -S

For a complete list of ptp4l configuration options, see man 8 ptp4l .

18.2.4 Delay Measurement

ptp4l measures time delay in two different ways: peer-to-peer (P2P) or end-to-end (E2E).

198 ptp4l Configuration File SLED 12 SP3

P2P
This method is specified with -P .
It reacts to changes in the network environment faster and is more accurate in measuring
the delay. It is only used in networks where each port exchanges PTP messages with one
other port. P2P needs to be supported by all hardware on the communication path.

E2E
This method is specified with -E . This is the default.

Automatic method selection

This method is specified with -A . The automatic option starts ptp4l in E2E mode, and
changes to P2P mode if a peer delay request is received.

Important: Common Measurement Method

All clocks on a single PTP communication path must use the same method to measure
the time delay. A warning will be printed if either a peer delay request is received on a
port using the E2E mechanism, or an E2E delay request is received on a port using the
P2P mechanism.

18.2.5 PTP Management Client: pmc

You can use the pmc client to obtain more detailed information about ptp41 . It reads from
the standard input—or from the command line—actions specified by name and management
ID. Then it sends the actions over the selected transport, and prints any received replies. There
are three actions supported: GET retrieves the specified information, SET updates the specified
information, and CMD (or COMMAND ) initiates the specified event.
By default, the management commands are addressed to all ports. The TARGET command can
be used to select a particular clock and port for the subsequent messages. For a complete list
of management IDs, run pmc help .

pmc -u -b 0 'GET TIME_STATUS_NP'

sending: GET TIME_STATUS_NP
90f2ca.fffe.20d7e9-0 seq 0 RESPONSE MANAGMENT TIME_STATUS_NP
master_offset 283
ingress_time 1361569379345936841
cumulativeScaledRateOffset +1.000000000
scaledLastGmPhaseChange 0
gmTimeBaseIndicator 0

199 PTP Management Client: pmc SLED 12 SP3

 lastGmPhaseChange 0x0000'0000000000000000.0000
gmPresent true
gmIdentity 00b058.feef.0b448a

The -b option specifies the boundary hops value in sent messages. Setting it to zero limits the
boundary to the local ptp4l instance. Increasing the value will retrieve the messages also from
PTP nodes that are further from the local instance. The returned information may include:

stepsRemoved
The number of communication nodes to the grandmaster clock.

offsetFromMaster, master_offset
The last measured offset of the clock from the master clock (nanoseconds).

meanPathDelay
The estimated delay of the synchronization messages sent from the master clock (nanosec-
onds).

gmPresent
If true , the PTP clock is synchronized to the master clock; the local clock is not the
grandmaster clock.

gmIdentity
This is the grandmaster's identity.

For a complete list of pmc command line options, see man 8 pmc .

18.3 Synchronizing the Clocks with phc2sys

Use phc2sys to synchronize the system clock to the PTP hardware clock (PHC) on the network
card. The system clock is considered a slave, while the network card a master. PHC itself is
synchronized with ptp4l (see Section 18.2, “Using PTP”). Use -s to specify the master clock by
device or network interface. Use -w to wait until ptp4l is in a synchronized state.

phc2sys -s eth0 -w

PTP operates in International Atomic Time (TAI), while the system clock uses Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC). If you do not specify -w to wait for ptp4l synchronization, you can specify the
offset in seconds between TAI and UTC with -O :

phc2sys -s eth0 -O -35

200 Synchronizing the Clocks with phc2sys SLED 12 SP3

You can run phc2sys as a service as well:

systemctl start phc2sys

In this case, phc2sys reads its options from the /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys le. For more in-
formation on phc2sys options, see man 8 phc2sys .
To enable the phc2sys service permanently, run the following:

systemctl enable phc2sys

To disable it, run

systemctl dosable phc2sys

18.3.1 Verifying Time Synchronization

When PTP time synchronization is working properly and hardware time stamping is used, ptp4l
and phc2sys output messages with time offsets and frequency adjustments periodically to the
system log.
An example of the ptp4l output:

ptp4l[351.358]: selected /dev/ptp0 as PTP clock

ptp4l[352.361]: port 1: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
ptp4l[352.361]: port 0: INITIALIZING to LISTENING on INITIALIZE
ptp4l[353.210]: port 1: new foreign master 00a069.eefe.0b442d-1
ptp4l[357.214]: selected best master clock 00a069.eefe.0b662d
ptp4l[357.214]: port 1: LISTENING to UNCALIBRATED on RS_SLAVE
ptp4l[359.224]: master offset 3304 s0 freq +0 path delay 9202
ptp4l[360.224]: master offset 3708 s1 freq -28492 path delay 9202
ptp4l[361.224]: master offset -3145 s2 freq -32637 path delay 9202
ptp4l[361.224]: port 1: UNCALIBRATED to SLAVE on MASTER_CLOCK_SELECTED
ptp4l[362.223]: master offset -145 s2 freq -30580 path delay 9202
ptp4l[363.223]: master offset 1043 s2 freq -28436 path delay 8972
[...]
ptp4l[371.235]: master offset 285 s2 freq -28511 path delay 9199
ptp4l[372.235]: master offset -78 s2 freq -28788 path delay 9204

An example of the phc2sys output:

phc2sys[616.617]: Waiting for ptp4l...

phc2sys[628.628]: phc offset 66341 s0 freq +0 delay 2729
phc2sys[629.628]: phc offset 64668 s1 freq -37690 delay 2726

201 Verifying Time Synchronization SLED 12 SP3

[...]
phc2sys[646.630]: phc offset -333 s2 freq -37426 delay 2747
phc2sys[646.630]: phc offset 194 s2 freq -36999 delay 2749

ptp4l normally writes messages very frequently. You can reduce the frequency with the sum-
mary_interval directive. Its value is an exponent of the 2^N expression. For example, to reduce
the output to every 1024 (which is equal to 2^10) seconds, add the following line to the /etc/
ptp4l.conf le:

summary_interval 10

You can also reduce the frequency of the phc2sys command's updates with the -u SUMMA-
RY-UPDATES option.

18.4 Examples of Configurations

This section includes several examples of ptp4l configuration. The examples are not full con-
figuration les but rather a minimal list of changes to be made to the specific les. The string
ethX stands for the actual network interface name in your setup.

EXAMPLE 18.1: SLAVE CLOCK USING SOFTWARE TIME STAMPING

/etc/sysconfig/ptp4l :

OPTIONS=”-f /etc/ptp4l.conf -i ethX”

No changes made to the distribution /etc/ptp4l.conf .

EXAMPLE 18.2: SLAVE CLOCK USING HARDWARE TIME STAMPING

/etc/sysconfig/ptp4l :

OPTIONS=”-f /etc/ptp4l.conf -i ethX”

/etc/sysconfig/phc2sys :

OPTIONS=”-s ethX -w”

No changes made to the distribution /etc/ptp4l.conf .

EXAMPLE 18.3: MASTER CLOCK USING HARDWARE TIME STAMPING

/etc/sysconfig/ptp4l :

OPTIONS=”-f /etc/ptp4l.conf -i ethX”

202 Examples of Configurations SLED 12 SP3

 /etc/sysconfig/phc2sys :

OPTIONS=”-s CLOCK_REALTIME -c ethX -w”

/etc/ptp4l.conf :

priority1 127

EXAMPLE 18.4: MASTER CLOCK USING SOFTWARE TIME STAMPING (NOT GENERALLY RECOMMENDED)

/etc/sysconfig/ptp4l :

OPTIONS=”-f /etc/ptp4l.conf -i ethX”

/etc/ptp4l.conf :

priority1 127

18.5 PTP and NTP

NTP and PTP time synchronization tools can coexist, synchronizing time from one to another
in both directions.

18.5.1 NTP to PTP Synchronization

When ntpd is used to synchronize the local system clock, you can configure the ptp4l to be
the grandmaster clock distributing the time from the local system clock via PTP. Include the
priority1 option in /etc/ptp4l.conf :

[global]
priority1 127
[eth0]

Then run ptp4l :

ptp4l -f /etc/ptp4l.conf

When hardware time stamping is used, you need to synchronize the PTP hardware clock to the
system clock with phc2sys :

phc2sys -c eth0 -s CLOCK_REALTIME -w

203 PTP and NTP SLED 12 SP3

18.5.2 PTP to NTP Synchronization
You can configure ntpd to distribute the time from the system clock synchronized by ptp4l
or phc2sys by using the local reference clock driver. Moreover, you need to stop ntpd from
adjusting the system clock—do not specify any remote NTP servers in /etc/ntp.conf :

server 127.127.1.0
fudge 127.127.1.0 stratum 0

Note: NTP and DHCP

When the DHCP client command dhclient receives a list of NTP servers, it adds them
to NTP configuration by default. To prevent this behavior, set

NETCONFIG_NTP_POLICY=""

in the /etc/sysconfig/network/config le.

204 PTP to NTP Synchronization SLED 12 SP3

A Documentation Updates

This chapter lists content changes for this document.

This manual was updated on the following dates:

Section A.1, “September 2017 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP3)”

Section A.2, “November 2016 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP2)”

Section A.3, “March 2016 (Maintenance Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP1)”

Section A.4, “December 2015 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP1)”

Section A.5, “February 2015 (Documentation Maintenance Update)”

Section A.6, “October 2014 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12)”

A.1 September 2017 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux

Enterprise Desktop 12 SP3)
General

Numerous small fixes and additions to the documentation, based on technical feed-
back.

Removed all references to the faillog package, which is no longer shipped (https://
bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=710788 ).

Chapter 2, System Monitoring Utilities

Added Section  2.7.3, “ Monitoring and Tuning the Thermal Subsystem: tmon ” (Fate
#319184 and #319185).

Updated Section  3.3, “Managing Log Files with logrotate” (Fate #322036 and
#322037).

205 September 2017 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP3) SLED 12 SP3
Chapter 17, Kexec and Kdump

Added Section  17.7.1.1, “Static IP Configuration for Kdump” (https://bugzil-

la.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=1023815 ).

Added information about YaST Kdump command line interface to Section 17.4, “Cal-
culating crashkernel Allocation Size” (Fate #320016).

Added Section  17.7.1.1, “Static IP Configuration for Kdump” (https://bugzil-

la.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=1023815 ).

In Section 17.7.1, “Manual Kdump Configuration”, added a missing step to the procedure

(https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=1051190 ).

In Section 17.4, “Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size”, xed a typo in a command

(https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=1043305 ).

A.2 November 2016 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux

Enterprise Desktop 12 SP2)
General

The e-mail address for documentation feedback has changed to doc-

[email protected] .

The documentation for Docker has been enhanced and renamed to Docker Guide.

Chapter 2, System Monitoring Utilities

Added Section 2.1.2, “dstat” (Fate #319795).

Added Section 2.2.3, “Processor Frequency Monitoring: turbostat” (Fate #319182).

206 November 2016 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP2) SLED 12 SP3
Chapter 3, Analyzing and Managing System Log Files

Removed references to faillog, which is no longer shipped with SUSE Linux Enterprise
Desktop.

Chapter 4, SystemTap—Filtering and Analyzing System Data

Adjusted permissions (Section  4.1.3, “Commands and Privileges”, https://bugzil-

la.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=992981 ).

Bugfixes

Corrected the values required for /proc/sys/kernel/numa_balancing (https://

bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=986834 ).

Added the tip Excluding Unused and Inactive CCW Devices on IBM z Systems to Chap-
ter 17, Kexec and Kdump (https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=990024 ).

A.3 March 2016 (Maintenance Release of SUSE Linux

Enterprise Desktop 12 SP1)
Chapter 12, Tuning I/O Performance
Documented parameter slice_idle and group_idle (https://bugzil-
la.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=958461 ).

A.4 December 2015 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux

Enterprise Desktop 12 SP1)
General

Book “Subscription Management Tool for SLES 12 SP3” is now part of the documentation
for SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop.

Add-ons provided by SUSE have been renamed as modules and extensions. The man-
uals have been updated to reflect this change.

207 March 2016 (Maintenance Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP1) SLED 12 SP3
 Numerous small fixes and additions to the documentation, based on technical feed-
back.

The registration service has been changed from Novell Customer Center to SUSE
Customer Center.

In YaST, you will now reach Network Settings via the System group. Network Devices
is gone (https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=867809 ).

Chapter 2, System Monitoring Utilities

Added Section 2.5.2, “ Show the Network Usage of Processes: nethogs ” (Fate #313501).

Chapter 6, Hardware-Based Performance Monitoring with Perf

Added Perf chapter, including introductory information about Instruction-Based

Sampling (IBS) (Fate #315868).

Chapter 18, Precision Time Protocol

Added PTP chapter (Fate #316795).

Bugfixes

Removed obsolete acpid.service (https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.c-

gi?id=918655 ).

Section  2.4.2, “Detailed Memory Usage: /proc/meminfo”: Expanded information on /

proc/meminfo (https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=926521 ).

Chapter  9, Kernel Control Groups: General Update (Fate #312101 and https://bugzil-
la.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=897313 ).

Section 12.2.2, “NOOP”: Added recommendation for NOOP in multipathing environments

(Fate #319091).

Section  17.4, “Calculating crashkernel Allocation Size”: Updated crashkernel al-

location recommendations (https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=948565 and
https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=948954 ).

208 December 2015 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12 SP1) SLED 12 SP3
A.5 February 2015 (Documentation Maintenance
Update)
Bugfixes

Section  12.2, “Available I/O Elevators”: Increasing individual thread throughput using
CFQ on SLE 12 (https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=907506 ).

Section 14.3.2, “Writeback Parameters”: Important difference in timing of I/O writes in

SLE 12 (https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=907504 ).

A.6 October 2014 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux

Enterprise Desktop 12)
General

Removed all KDE documentation and references because KDE is no longer shipped.

Removed all references to SuSEconfig, which is no longer supported (Fate #100011).

Move from System V init to systemd (Fate #310421). Updated affected parts of the
documentation.

YaST Runlevel Editor has changed to Services Manager (Fate #312568). Updated
affected parts of the documentation.

Removed all references to ISDN support, as ISDN support has been removed (Fate
#314594).

Removed all references to the YaST DSL module as it is no longer shipped (Fate
#316264).

Removed all references to the YaST Modem module as it is no longer shipped (Fate
#316264).

Btrfs has become the default le system for the root partition (Fate #315901). Up-
dated affected parts of the documentation.

The dmesg now provides human-readable time stamps in ctime() -like format (Fate
#316056). Updated affected parts of the documentation.

209 February 2015 (Documentation Maintenance Update) SLED 12 SP3

 syslog and syslog-ng have been replaced by rsyslog (Fate #316175). Updated affected
parts of the documentation.

MariaDB is now shipped as the relational database instead of MySQL (Fate #313595).
Updated affected parts of the documentation.

SUSE-related products are no longer available from http://download.novell.com but

from http://download.suse.com . Adjusted links accordingly.

Novell Customer Center has been replaced with SUSE Customer Center. Updated
affected parts of the documentation.

/var/run is mounted as tmpfs (Fate #303793). Updated affected parts of the doc-
umentation.

The following architectures are no longer supported: IA64 and x86. Updated affected
parts of the documentation.

The traditional method for setting up the network with ifconfig has been replaced
by wicked . Updated affected parts of the documentation.

A lot of networking commands are deprecated and have been replaced by newer
commands (usually ip ). Updated affected parts of the documentation.

arp : ip neighbor
ifconfig : ip addr , ip link
iptunnel : ip tunnel
iwconfig : iw
nameif : ip link , ifrename
netstat : ss , ip route , ip -s link , ip maddr
route : ip route

Numerous small fixes and additions to the documentation, based on technical feed-
back.

Chapter 2, System Monitoring Utilities

Updated command outputs with samples produced with SUSE Linux Enterprise 12.

Corrected the description of si , so and in in Section 2.1.1, “vmstat”.

Corrected the explanation for majflt and the statement about spreading I/O re-
quests over multiple disks in Section 2.1.3.1, “Generating reports with sar”.

210 October 2014 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12) SLED 12 SP3
 Replaced deprecated tools ifconfig and netstat with ip , ethtool and ss in
Section 2.5, “Networking”.

Added documentation about sysctl to Section  2.6.2, “System Control Parameters: /

proc/sys/”.

Added the section Section 2.7.4, “MCELog: Machine Check Exceptions (MCE)”.

Added details on /usr/bin/time to Section 2.10.1, “Time Measurement with time”.

Chapter 4, SystemTap—Filtering and Analyzing System Data

Added a link to the example scripts Web page to Section 4.1.1, “SystemTap Scripts”.

Chapter 7, OProfile—System-Wide Profiler

Corrected statements on the effects of sampling rates in Section 7.4.2, “Getting Event Config-
urations”.

Chapter 10, Automatic Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) Balancing

New chapter.

Chapter 13, Tuning the Task Scheduler

Removed section about the outdated O1 task scheduler.

Clarified kernel variables in Section 14.1.5, “Writeback”.

Chapter 14, Tuning the Memory Management Subsystem

Added detailed descriptions on tunable parameters to Section 14.3.2, “Writeback Parameters”.

Chapter 17, Kexec and Kdump

Added a tip on sharing the dump directory in Section 17.7.2, “YaST Configuration” (Fate
#313185).

Added a tip on identifying a kernel crash dump with kdumpid (Fate #312855) to
Section 17.8, “Analyzing the Crash Dump”.

Obsolete Content

Chapter Monitoring with Nagios has been removed from Part II, “System Monitoring” (Fate
#316136), because Nagios is no longer shipped on SUSE Linux Enterprise 12.

Chapter Perf mon2—Hardware-Based Performance Monitoring has been removed from

Part  III, “Kernel Monitoring”, because perfmon2 is no longer shipped on SUSE Linux
Enterprise 12.

211 October 2014 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12) SLED 12 SP3
Bugfixes

Removed notes about zone_reclaim_mode in Chapter 14, Tuning the Memory Manage-

ment Subsystem (https://bugzilla.suse.com/show_bug.cgi?id=874971 ).

212 October 2014 (Initial Release of SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 12) SLED 12 SP3
B GNU Licenses
formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for
This appendix contains the GNU Free Docu- which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generat-
ed HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
mentation License version 1.2. The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as
are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For
works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means the text near the
GNU Free Documentation License most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language.
Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as "Acknowledgements",
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".) To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when
you modify the Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according to this
definition.
0. PREAMBLE
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included
document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication
and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or non-commercially. that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this
Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their License.
work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative works of the document must 2. VERBATIM COPYING
themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which
is a copyleft license designed for free software. You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or non-
We have designed this License to use it for manuals for free software, because free software commercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying
needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct
be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you
printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of
or reference. copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly
display copies.
1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a
notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the
the conditions stated herein. The "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work. Any Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts,
member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept the license if you you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts:
copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law. Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers
A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover
of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language. must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may
add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that
long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
as verbatim copying in other respects.
Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly
within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to t legibly, you should put the
Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter rst ones listed (as many as t reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, adjacent pages.
philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you
The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general net-
License. If a section does not t the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be work-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete
designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you
does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none. must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quanti-
ty, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until
The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or
at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your
Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A
agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before
A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a for-
redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an
mat whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the doc-
updated version of the Document.
ument straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic
paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable
for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for
input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent le format whose markup,
or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification
by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial
amount of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Tex-
info input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and stan-
dard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples
of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary

213 SLED 12 SP3

 The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use
4. MODIFICATIONS
their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of
sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under
must do these things in the Modified Version: the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the
combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the
list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you
Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any,
preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a
previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invari-
ant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with
B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding
authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least ve at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if
of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
than ve), unless they release you from this requirement. Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History" in the various original
publisher. documents, forming one section Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
"Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
Entitled "Endorsements".
E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other
copyright notices.
6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public
permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under
shown in the Addendum below. this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a
single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover
for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
Texts given in the Document's license notice.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add to it an item
stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version
as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given
on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent docu-
the previous sentence. ments or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate"
if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the com-
J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to
pilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in
a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in
an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not
the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the
themselves derivative works of the Document.
"History" section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published
at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then

version it refers to gives permission. if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts
may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic
K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", Preserve the Title equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on
of the section, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.

L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and 8. TRANSLATION
in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the
section titles. Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the

M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section may not be included Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires

in the Modified Version. special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some
or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You
N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements" or to conflict in may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and
title with any Invariant Section. any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers. License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement
between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Se- original version will prevail.
condary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option
If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", or "History", the
designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of
requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from
actual title.
any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains nothing but endorse-
ments of your Modified Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer review
9. TERMINATION
or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly pro-
standard.
vided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the
You may add a passage of up to ve words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25
Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only
parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the
same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are
acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.

214 SLED 12 SP3

10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documen-
tation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/
copyleft/ .
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies
that a particular numbered version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you have
the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any
later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever
published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.

ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents

Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME.

Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU
Free Documentation License”.

If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the
“with...Texts.” line with this:

with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.

If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three,
merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing
these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General
Public License, to permit their use in free software.

215 SLED 12 SP3